JP6527921B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game called pachislot having a plurality of reels on each surface of which a plurality of symbols are arranged, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player after game media such as medals and coins have been inserted into the gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as "start operation"), and all reels are rotated. Output a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that the player has pressed a stop button provided corresponding to each reel (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. Do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected, lottery processing using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery processing") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as "internal winning combination") Stop the rotation of the reel based on the timing of the stop operation). Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols relating to the establishment of the winning is displayed, a bonus corresponding to the combination of the symbols is given to the player. In addition, as an example of the privilege given to the player, the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without paying out the game medium (medal and the like) and consuming the game medium. , Activation of a bonus game, etc., where the payout opportunities for gaming media are increased.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, there is known a gaming machine provided with a display device for displaying various images and a touch panel disposed in front of the display device and at least a part of which is superimposed on the display device For example, refer to Patent Document 1). The touch panel in such a game machine has light transparency, and can detect the position touched by a finger of a player or the like on the touch panel. The player or the like opposes a desired item among various selectable items displayed on the display device in a position corresponding to the desired item on the touch panel, for example, an item displayed on the display device in the front-rear direction The position can be selected by touching the finger.

JP, 2013-48774, A

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, when an operator such as a player touches the touch panel with a finger, the selection of a desired item is detected from among the items displayed on the display device. When a person mistakenly touches a finger on the touch panel at a position other than the position corresponding to the desired item when selecting the item, the selection of the desired item may not be detected. By the way, it has been required to improve the interest of the effects relating to the game lock.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of effects relating to a game lock.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

Start operation detection means (for example, a start switch 64 described later) for detecting a start operation by a player;
Internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control circuit 91 described later) which determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means;
Variable display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R described later and a stepping motor, which are constituted by a plurality of display lines and variably display symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means )When,
Stop operation detection means (for example, a stop switch described later) for detecting a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means (for example, a main control circuit 91 described later) for stopping variable display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means;
An effect device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) that performs an effect of a game;
A game lock control means (for example, a game lock control means for generating a game lock which makes detection of a game operation by a player invalid for a predetermined period or delayed) when a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means And a main control circuit 91) described later,
A main control circuit (for example, a main control circuit 91 described later) that performs various controls in accordance with the progress of the game;
And a sub control circuit (for example, a sub control circuit 101 described later) for controlling the effect device.
The main control circuit variably displays the symbols of the plurality of display rows during occurrence of the game lock, and stops the variation display regardless of the detection of the stop operation by the player.
The gaming machine, wherein the sub control circuit causes the rendering device to perform a predetermined effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of braking of the variable display of the symbol during the occurrence of the game lock.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the effects relating to the game lock.

It is an explanatory view explaining a functional flow in a game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing an example of appearance composition in a game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is an internal structure in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention, and is a perspective view of the state which opened the front door. It is a top view showing a display in a game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view of the touch sensor module attached to the display in the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is an explanatory view which saw the front door in the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front. It is a block diagram showing a control system in a game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a main control circuit in a game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a sub control circuit in a game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a touch sensor relay circuit in a game machine of a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | positioning table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table at the time of bonus operation in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 17 shows an example of a general gaming state internal lottery table according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 gaming states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 gaming states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT4 gaming states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 1) for small part and replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 2) for small part and replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 3) for small part and replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 4) for small part and replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for a rotation stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initialization setting table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initialization setting table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for 1st stop at the time of the forward press in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of forward press in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table of 2nd * 3rd stop at the time of the order push in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the irregular pushing time stop table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing-in priority table selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing-in priority table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a game lock lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol corresponding prize operation flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storing area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the action | operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing-in priority data storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 6 is a transition flow diagram of an RT state of the gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a correspondence table of a winning combination and a stop order in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination, stop order, and RT transfer in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the CZ (chance zone) lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in additional lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cut-in generation | occurrence | production lottery table in CZ (chance zone) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of-GB G in BB of a gaming machine in one embodiment of this invention, and a lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table in BB of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 7 is a view showing an example of a BB middle BR random determination table of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of BR1 continuous lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of BR2 continuation lottery table of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition addition lottery table in BR of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 7 is a view showing an example of an additional addition and promotion lottery table in BR of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition number-of-additions game number lottery table for additional addition A of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of-additions game number lottery table for additional additional B of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition number-of-games random selection table for additional additional C of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a causal value lottery table (the 1) of a gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value random determination table (the 2) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value random determination table (the 3) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value random determination table (the 4) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value random determination table (the 5) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a causal value lottery table (the 6) of a gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value random determination table (the 7) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the causal value random determination table (the 8) of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a causal value lottery table (the 9) of a gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the temporary causal value lottery table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal point random-selection table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a causal value stock lottery table of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operating condition table of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub storage area of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the process example of the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal acceptance / start check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery value change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game lock lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initialization process in one Embodiment of this invention. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a game start lock process according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the drawing-in priority storing process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the drawing-in priority table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the number determination process of sliding symbols in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd and 3rd stop processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line change bit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line mask data change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority attraction-in control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 2nd after-stop control change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of RT control processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of bonus end check processing in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of bonus operation check processing in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interruption processing by control of the main CPU in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board | substrate communication task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the contents determination process of effects in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of start command reception in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during a false bonus in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ART withdrawal processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of BR continuation in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of BR continuation decision in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the normal middle processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the causal value related process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing under preparation in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the precursor check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of reel stop command reception in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of display command reception in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the penalty determination processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of no-operation command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows the example of the lock production control processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the item control task in one Embodiment of this invention. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a lamp control task in an embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flow chart illustrating an example of a sound control task in an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the animation control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the touch-panel control task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the touch-panel input edit process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the warning screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the hall | hole menu task in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the hall | hole menu screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the hall | hole menu process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the error information log | history screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the maintenance process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the maintenance screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and a touch-panel maintenance screen. It is a figure which shows the example of the operation state display table in the maintenance screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the touch-panel maintenance screen by which the display position of the grid line in one Embodiment of this invention was changed. It is a figure which shows the example of the guide menu image displayed on the guide initial image displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and a sub screen. It is a figure which shows the state which the finger is touching on the guide menu "arrangement / payout" of the guide menu screen displayed on the sub screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the state which the finger is touching on the guide menu "start uni memo" of the guide menu screen displayed on the sub screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the uni memo initial screen image displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and the uni memo menu screen displayed on a sub screen. It is a figure which shows the example of the password input menu screen displayed on the password display image and sub screen which are displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention, and shows the state which the finger is touching on password input menu "E". FIG. FIG. 17 is a view showing an example of a password display image displayed on the main screen and a password input menu screen displayed on the sub screen in the embodiment of the present invention, showing a state where a finger is touching password input menu “F”. FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which displayed "F" which concerns on detection of selection on the password display image displayed on the main screen in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance structure of the game machine (pachinko) in a modification. It is an external appearance front view of the game machine in a modification. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game machine in a modification. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the gaming machine in a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit with which the game machine in a modification is equipped.

Hereinafter, a pachislot machine which is a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the present embodiment, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function for navigating establishment of a specific small combination with a lamp or the like, and a winning probability of replay when a specific symbol combination is displayed. A pachislot equipped with an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") function in which a function for activating a replay time (hereinafter referred to as "RT"), which is a gaming state higher than normal, is simultaneously activated will be described.

<Function flow>
First, referring to FIG. 1, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described.
In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing a game. In addition to the medals, coins, gaming balls, point data or tokens for gaming may be applied as gaming media.

  When medals are inserted by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value to determine an internal winning combination. The internal lottery means is carried by a main control circuit described later. By the determination of the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitting display along the later-described winning determination line is determined. In addition, as a classification of combination of the symbol, it is something which relates to the “prize” to which the player is given a privilege such as payout of medals, operation of replay, activation of bonus, etc. Is provided.

  In addition, when the start lever is operated, rotation of the plurality of reels is performed. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is carried by a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachi slot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a prescribed time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols moving with the rotation of the reel within this prescribed time is referred to as the “number of sliding symbols”. If the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is determined to be four symbols, and if the prescribed period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is determined to be one symbol.

  When an internal winning combination that permits combination display of symbols relating to winning is determined, the reel stop control means normally determines that a combination of symbols has a winning determination line within a prescribed time of 190 msec (for four symbols of symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means specifies, for example, for one or more reels, at the time of operation of a bonus bonus (CB) which is a second kind special character and a middle bonus (MB) for operating CB continuously. The rotation of the reel is stopped so that the combination of the symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line within a time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various prescribed times corresponding to the game state to rotate the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the winning determination line. Stop it.

  Thus, when the rotations of the plurality of reels are all stopped, the prize determination means determines whether or not the combination of the symbols displayed along the prize determination line relates to a prize. The winning determination means is carried by a main control circuit described later. When it is determined by the winning determination means that the winning is determined, a bonus such as medal payout is given to the player. In pachislot, the above series of flows are performed as one game.

  Moreover, in the pachislot, in the above-described series of flows, display of an image performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, output of light performed by various lamps, output of sound performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is used. Various effects are performed.

  When the start lever is operated, a random number for presentation (hereinafter, random number for presentation) is extracted separately from the random number used to determine the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determination means determines by lottery the one to be executed this time out of a plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination. The effect content determination means is carried by a sub control circuit described later.

  When the contents of the effect are determined, the effect executing means interlocks with respective triggers such as the start of the rotation of the reels, the stop of the rotations of the respective reels, the determination of the presence or absence of winning, etc. to execute the corresponding effects. Thus, in Pachislot, the player has an opportunity or opportunity to know the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of the symbols to be aimed) by executing the presentation content associated with the internal winning combination. Thus, the player's interest can be improved.

<Structure of Pachislot>
Next, with reference to FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, the structure of the pachislot in the present embodiment will be described.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi slot 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi slot 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a that accommodates a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be able to open and close.
Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only the handle 7 on one side is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a concave portion which is used when carrying the pachislot 1.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R has a cylindrical reel body and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) designs are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  The front door 2 b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, and a liquid crystal display device 11 showing one specific example of the display device. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be able to open and close using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachi slot 1.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper portion of the door main body 9 and performs effects by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (display screen) 11a including a display window 4 for displaying symbols drawn on three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. In the present embodiment, an image is displayed using the entire display unit 11 a including the display window 4, and effects are performed.

Hereinafter, the display windows 4 are referred to as a left display window 4L, a middle display window 4C, and a right display window 4R, respectively.
The display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are formed of, for example, a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are provided at positions overlapping the arrangement areas of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and in front of the three reels (player side Provided to be located at Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 through the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

  In the present embodiment, the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are arranged in series among the plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind them is stopped. It is set to a size that can display one pattern. That is, in the frame of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R, upper, middle and lower areas are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each area. In the present embodiment, a line connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle region of the right reel 3R is defined as a winning determination line for determining whether or not a winning is to be made.

  The front panel 10 is attached to the upper portion of the door body 9 and is set to a size that covers the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 10 is disposed on the display unit 11 a side of the liquid crystal display device 11 so as to overlap, and has a decorative frame 100 having two panel openings 100 a and 100 b for exposing the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11. And a transparent protective cover (not shown) for closing the panel openings 100a and 100b.

  The decorative frame 100 has a partition piece 112 that divides the panel opening 100a and the panel opening 100b. The two panel openings 100 a and 100 b are partitioned by the partition pieces 112 so as to be aligned in the vertical direction. The panel opening 100 a of the decorative frame 100 exposes the display portion 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11. The panel opening 100b of the decoration frame 100 exposes the display portion 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The decorative frame 100 is provided with a head lamp 21, a reel lamp 22, a decoration unit 121, and a rotary feature unit 122. The headlamp 21 has a group of LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), and is disposed on the top of the decoration frame 100. The reel lamp 22 has an LED group, and is disposed at both ends in the left-right direction of the decorative frame 100 and in the vicinity of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 turn on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect. The decoration unit 121 is disposed on the right side of the panel opening 100a in the decoration frame 100, and has an LED (Light Emitting Diode) not shown. The decoration unit 121 lights up with a color and a lighting pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect when the special effect and the predetermined effect are performed. The rotary accessory unit 122 is disposed on the left side of the panel opening 100 a in the decoration frame 100. Also, the rotary combination product unit 122 includes a rotary combination product (gear combination) 123 (see FIG. 6), and an accessory drive unit 124 (see FIG. 7) including a stepping motor that rotates the rotary combination 123, And has a cover member 125 covering the rotary part 123. When a predetermined effect is performed, the rotation combination 123 rotates in a pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect.

  A pedestal 12 is formed at the center of the door body 9. The pedestal unit 12 includes various devices to be operated by the player (the medal insertion slot 13, the MAX bet button 14, the 1 bet button 15, the start lever 16, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, the enter button 28, the select button 29) are provided.

  The medal insertion slot 13 is provided to receive a medal dropped from the outside into the pachislot 1 by the player. The medal received from the medal insertion slot 13 is used for one game with the preset number (for example, 3) as the upper limit, and the portion exceeding the preset number is deposited inside the pachislot 1 Can do (so-called credit function).

  The MAX bet button 14 and the 1 bet button 15 are provided to determine the number of medals to be used for one game from the medals deposited inside the pachislot 1. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal 12 is provided with a settlement button. The settlement button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot 1.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all the reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  The enter button 28 and the select button 29 are provided to select any of a plurality of selectable items on various screens (for example, see FIG. 128 described later) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. In response to the depression of the select button 29, the position of the cursor for designating one of the plurality of displayed items, and the item to be highlighted are changed. Further, in response to depression of the enter button 28, a designated item is selected.

  Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 23 formed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 23 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as benefits (hereinafter, the number of payouts) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits). indicate.

  At the lower part of the door main body 9, a medal payout opening 18, a medal receiving tray 19, speakers 20L, 20R and the like are provided. The medal payout opening 18 guides the medals discharged by the driving of a medal payout device 43 described later to the outside. The medal receiver 19 stores the medals discharged from the medal payout opening 18. Further, the speakers 20L and 20R output sounds such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the effects.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachi slot 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the pachi slot 1.

  The cabinet 2a is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with one surface on the front side opened. A main control board 41 constituting a main control circuit 91 is provided at the upper part in the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main operation of the game in the pachislot 1 and the flow between the operations such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, and determination of the presence or absence of a prize. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

  Three reels (a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C and a right reel 3R) are provided at a central portion in the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to the corresponding stepping motor via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  A medal payout device 43 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device 43) having a structure capable of containing a large amount of medals and capable of discharging them one by one is provided at the lower portion in the cabinet 2a. In the cabinet 2a, on the left side of the hopper device 43 (left side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front), a power supply device 44 for supplying necessary power to each device of the pachi slot 1 is provided.

  Further, a medal auxiliary storage 45 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 43 (right side when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front) in the cabinet 2a. The medal auxiliary storage 45 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 43. The medal auxiliary storage 45 is engaged with the bottom surface of the cabinet 2a, and is configured to be removable from the cabinet 2a.

  A sub control board 42 constituting a sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9), which will be described later, is provided on the top of the back side (the part opposite to the display screen side) of the front door 2b. The sub control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls execution of effects by displaying a video or the like. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 101 will be described later.

  Further, a selector 46 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 46 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, and the like of medals inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 13 are appropriate, and guides the medals determined to be appropriate to the hopper device 43. Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor 46S (see FIG. 7) is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 46, for detecting that the appropriate medal has passed.

[Display and touch sensor module]
Next, the configuration of the liquid crystal display device 11 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 4 is a plan view of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit 11 a and a frame unit 11 b surrounding the display unit 11 a. The display unit 11a is formed in a horizontally long rectangle, and has the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R described above. The frame portion 11 b is formed in a rectangular frame shape surrounding four sides of the display portion 11 a.

  A touch sensor module 31 is disposed on the side (the side opposite to the display window 4C) of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a. That is, the touch sensor module 31 is disposed at the lower right corner of the display unit 11a.

FIG. 5 is a plan view of the touch sensor module 31. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 5, the touch sensor module 31 is a surface capacitive touch sensor, and includes a sensor unit 32, a flexible printed circuit 33, and a touch sensor IC (Integrated Circuit) 34.

  The sensor unit 32 is formed in a rectangular plate shape. The sensor unit 32 has a rectangular transparent substrate 35, electrode patterns 36a, 36b and 36c provided on one surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35, a transparent conductive film, and a protective cover (not shown). As a material of the transparent substrate 35, glass can be mentioned, for example. The protective cover is formed of a transparent material and covers the transparent conductive film and the electrode patterns 36a, 36b and 36c.

  The electrode patterns 36a, 36b and 36c are disposed at the outer edge of the transparent substrate 35, and the transparent conductive film is formed in a region surrounded by the electrode patterns 36a, 36b and 36c. The electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c are electrically connected to the transparent conductive film.

  The electrode pattern 36 a is formed in an I shape, and extends along one long side of the transparent substrate 35. The electrode pattern 36 b is formed in an L shape, and extends along one short side and one long side of the transparent substrate 35. The electrode pattern 36 c is formed in an L shape, and extends along the other short side and one long side of the transparent substrate 35. An electrode pattern is not formed on the other long side of the transparent substrate 35. That is, an electrode pattern is not formed on one side (the other long side) of the sensor unit 32.

  The flexible printed circuit board 33 is connected to one long side of the transparent board 35, and has a connector 33a. The connector 33a is connected to the touch sensor relay substrate 73 (see FIG. 7). Electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c are electrically connected to the flexible printed circuit 33. The touch sensor IC 34 is mounted on the flexible printed circuit board 33.

  A uniform electric field is generated on the surface 35a of the transparent substrate 35 in the sensor unit 32, and when the finger touches the surface 35a (protective cover) of the transparent substrate 35, the state of the electric field on the surface 35a changes. As a result, a weak current is generated in the electrode patterns 36a, 36b, and 36c, and the current value is output to the touch sensor IC 34. The touch sensor IC 34 detects that the finger is touched on the surface 35 a, the position where the finger is touched, and the detachment of the finger based on the current values of the electrode patterns 36 a, 36 b, 36 c.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a portion of the electrode patterns 36 b and 36 c of the touch sensor module 31 along one long side of the transparent substrate 35 and the electrode pattern 36 a face the right side piece of the frame portion 11 b. Further, a portion of the electrode pattern 36b along the short side of the transparent substrate 35 faces the lower side piece of the frame portion 11b.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory view of the front door 2b as viewed from the front. In FIG. 6, the cover member 125 of the rotary product unit 122 is shown transparent.
As shown in FIG. 6, the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11 is exposed from the openings 100 a and 100 b of the front panel 10. The touch sensor module 31 is disposed to the side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a. Thus, a touch input unit (touch panel) 31a using the touch sensor module 31 is formed on the side of the display window 4R in the display unit 11a.

  The electrode patterns 36a and 36b provided on one long side and one short side of the sensor unit 32 (see FIG. 4) of the touch sensor module 31 are opposed to the frame portion 11b and covered by the front panel 10. . The electrode pattern 36c is not opposed to the frame portion 11b, but is covered by the front panel 10 (partition piece 112). The electrode pattern is not formed on the other long side of the sensor unit 32 in the touch sensor module 31.

Thus, the electrode pattern of the touch sensor module 31 can be prevented from appearing at the boundary between the area where the touch input unit 31a is provided and the area where the touch input unit 31a is not provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the boundary between the area in which the touch input unit 31a is provided and the area in which the touch input unit 31a is not provided.
Hereinafter, an area provided with the touch input unit 31a of the touch sensor module 31 in the display unit (display screen) 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 may be referred to as a sub screen 113, and the other area may be referred to as a main screen 111.

<Control system equipped with Pachislot>
Next, a control system included in the pachi slot 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachi slot 1.

The pachi slot 1 has a main control board 41 disposed in the cabinet 2a and a sub control board 42 disposed in the front door 2b.
The main control board 41 is electrically connected to the reel relay terminal board 51, the setting key type switch 52, the cabinet side relay board 53, the door relay terminal board 54, and the power supply board 44b of the power supply device 44. There is.

  The reel relay terminal plate 51 is disposed inside the reel bodies of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 51 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 41 to the stepping motor. The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting of the pachi slot 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi slot 1.

  An external concentrated terminal plate 56, a hopper device 43, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are electrically connected to the cabinet side relay board 53. The cabinet side relay board 53 relays a signal output from the main control board 41 to the external concentrated terminal plate 56, the hopper device 43 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57. That is, the external concentrated terminal board 56, the hopper device 43, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 57 are connected to the main control board 41 via the cabinet side relay board 53.

  The external concentrated terminal plate 56 is attached to the cabinet 2 a and is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal and a security signal to the outside of the pachi slot 1. About hopper device 43, since it mentioned above, explanation is omitted.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 penetrates the medal auxiliary storage 45. The medal auxiliary storage switch 57 detects whether the medal auxiliary storage 45 is full of medals.

  A power switch 44 a is connected to the power supply substrate 44 b of the power supply device 44. The power switch 44a is turned on when the necessary power is supplied to the pachi slot 1.

  To the door relay terminal board 54, the medal sensor 46S, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66 and the sub relay board 67 are connected. . That is, the medal sensor 46S, the door open / close monitoring switch 61, the BET switch 62, the settlement switch 63, the start switch 64, the stop switch board 65, the game operation display board 66 and the sub relay board 67 It is connected to the control board 41.

  The medal sensor 46S detects that the medal has passed through the inside of the selector 46 described above, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The door opening and closing monitoring switch 61 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening and closing of the front door 2 b to the outside of the pachi slot 1. The BET switch 62 detects that the MAX bet button 24 and the 1 BET button 25 (see FIG. 2) have been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The settlement switch 63 detects that the settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player, and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41. The start switch 64 detects that the player has operated the start lever 26 (start operation), and outputs the detection result to the main control board 41.

  The stop switch board 65 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoppable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch substrate 65 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 27L, 27C, 27R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 66 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment indicator 23 when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable and when the player plays a game again when accepting the insertion of medals. It is a substrate for A 7-segment display 23 and an LED 69 are connected to the game operation display board 66. The LED 69 lights, for example, a mark for displaying the start of the game, a mark for playing the game again, and the like.

  The sub relay board 67 relays a wire connecting the sub control board 42 and the main control board 41. Further, the sub relay board 67 relays a wire connecting the sub control board 42 and a plurality of boards or the like disposed around the sub control board 42. That is, the sub relay board 67 includes the sub control board 42, the sound board 71, the LED control board 72, the touch sensor relay board 73, the 24 h door opening / closing monitoring unit 74, the item control board 78, and the enter switch 75 and select switch 79 are electrically connected.

  The sub control board 42 is connected to the main control board 41 via the door relay terminal plate 54 and the sub relay board 67. Also, the sub control board 42, via the sub relay board 67, the sound board 71, the LED control board 72, the touch sensor relay board 73, the 24 h door opening and closing monitoring unit 74, the item control board 78, enter The switch 75 and the select switch 79 are electrically connected.

  The sound board 71 outputs sound to the speakers 20L and 20R. The LED control board 72 lights up the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 showing one specific example of the light source according to the effect executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9), and displays the lighting pattern. .

  The touch sensor relay substrate 73 transmits the input information output from the touch sensor module 31 to the sub control circuit 101. The circuit configuration of the touch sensor relay substrate 73 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The 24h door opening and closing monitoring unit 74 stores the history of opening and closing the front door 2b. When the front door 2b is opened, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 74 outputs a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 42 (sub control circuit 101).

  The item control board 78 controls the driving of the item driving unit 124 in the rotation pattern instructed by the sub control circuit 101 in accordance with the effect executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9), The object 123 is rotated.

  Enter switch 75 detects that enter button 28 is pressed, and outputs the detection result to sub control board 42 via sub relay board 67. Further, the select switch 79 detects that the select button 29 has been pressed, and outputs the detection result to the sub control board 42 via the sub relay board 67.

  A ROM cartridge substrate 76 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 77 are connected to the sub control substrate 42. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 is a substrate for managing an image (video) for presentation, sound, light (head lamp 21 and reel lamp 22), and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 77 is a substrate for relaying a wire connecting the sub control substrate 42 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 configured by the main control board 41 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot 1.

  The main control circuit 91 mainly includes a microcomputer 92 installed on a main control substrate 41. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94 and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by the execution of the control program.

  To the main CPU 93, a clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98 and a sampling circuit 99 are connected. Clock pulse generation circuit 96 and frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a predetermined range of random numbers (e.g., 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times of pulse output to the stepping motor of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. Thus, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angles of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many reels have been rotated).
The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one rotation. The reel index is provided, for example, at a predetermined position of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R Detection is performed by a reel position detection unit (not shown) provided with a detection piece interposed therebetween.

  Here, management of the rotation angles of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown).

  That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  In the present embodiment, basically, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to four symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 27L is pressed, the symbols on the left reel 3L in the middle of the display window 4 and the respective patterns within the range up to the symbol four symbols ahead can be stopped at the middle of the display window 4 It becomes a good pattern.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 101 configured by the sub control substrate 42 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachislot 1.

  The sub control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effects based on commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a GPU (graphic processing unit) 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

  The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge substrate 76 basically comprises a program storage area and a data storage area.

  The program storage area stores a control program to be executed by the sub CPU 102. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and a random number value for effect extraction, and an effect registration task for determining and registering effect contents (effect data) Is included. In addition, drawing control tasks and animation control tasks (see FIG. 123) for controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2) based on the determined rendering content, light by light sources such as the headlamps Control task (see FIG. 121) that controls the output of the sound control task (see FIG. 122) that controls the output of the sound from the speakers 20L and 20R, and an accessory control task (see FIG. 120) and the like.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data relating to creation of a video. Also, a storage area for storing sound data relating to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern, and the like are included.

  The sub RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The sub CPU 102, the GPU 104, the drawing RAM (including a frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and cause the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the created image.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 20L and 20R to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls lighting and extinguishing of the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 according to the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the operation of the rotating role object 123 in accordance with the feature data specified by the effect content.

<Touch sensor relay circuit>
Next, the touch sensor relay circuit 151 configured by the touch sensor relay substrate 73 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the touch sensor relay circuit 151. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 10, the touch sensor relay circuit 151 is electrically connected to the sub relay board 67 and the touch sensor module 31. The touch sensor relay circuit 151 determines an operation command and XY coordinate data based on the operation XY coordinate data supplied from the touch sensor module 31, and transmits the operation command and the XY coordinate data to the sub control circuit 101 via the sub relay board 67.

  The touch sensor relay circuit 151 basically includes a touch sensor LSI (Large Scale Integration) 152, connectors 153 and 154, regulators 155 and 156, a sub control reception buffer 157, and a sub control transmission buffer 158. .

  The connector 154, the regulator 155, the sub control reception buffer 157, and the sub control transmission buffer 158 are connected to the touch sensor LSI 152. The sub control reception buffer 157 is connected to the connector 153 and the regulator 155, and the sub control transmission buffer 158 is connected to the connector 153 and the regulator 156.

  The connector 153 is electrically connected to the connector 131 mounted on the sub relay board 67. Further, the connector 154 is electrically connected to the aforementioned connector 33 a of the touch sensor module 31.

  The regulator 155 controls the DC (direct current) 12 V power supplied via the connector 153 to a DC 3.3 V power, and outputs it to the touch sensor LSI 152, the connector 154, and the sub control reception buffer 157. Also, the regulator 156 controls the DC 12 V power supplied via the connector 153 to a DC 5 V power and outputs the power to the sub control transmission buffer 158.

  The sub control reception buffer 157 temporarily stores reception data (RXD) transmitted from the sub control circuit 101 and received by the connector 153. Then, the stored reception data is transmitted to the touch sensor LSI 152.

  The touch sensor LSI 152 performs various operation commands representing the type of operation on the touch input unit 31 a (see FIG. 6) of the touch sensor module 31 based on touch input information supplied from the touch sensor module 31 via the connector 154. Decide. Further, XY coordinate data is determined based on the operation XY coordinate data supplied from the touch sensor module 31.

  The sub control transmission buffer 158 stores various operation commands and XY coordinate data output from the touch sensor LSI 152. Then, various operation commands and XY coordinate data are transmitted to the sub control circuit 101 via the connector 153 as transmission data (TXD).

  In the present embodiment, since the touch sensor relay circuit determines the operation type and the XY coordinates based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor module, the processing related to the touch sensor module 31 performed by the sub control circuit 101 is reduced. Can. As a result, the load on the sub control circuit 101 when the touch sensor module 31 is mounted can be reduced.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 39, configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described.

[Symbol arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data for specifying the position of each symbol in the rotational direction of each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R, and the type of symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter referred to as symbol code (FIG. 11 Define the correspondence with the symbol code table of

  In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol arranged in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the display window 4 is defined as “0”. Then, in each reel, "0" to "20" corresponding to the symbol counter are designated as symbol positions in the order of proceeding in the direction of rotation of the reel (direction of arrow A in FIG. 11) with reference to symbol position "0". Assigned to a symbol.

  That is, by referring to the symbol counter values ("0" to "20") and the symbol arrangement table, the symbols displayed in the upper, middle and lower regions of each reel in the frame of the display window 4 Can identify the type of For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is "8", in the upper, middle and lower regions of the left reel 3L in the frame of the display window 4, "#" of the symbol position "9" A symbol corresponding to "watermelon", "red 7" at symbol position "8" and "bell 1" at symbol position "7" is displayed.

[Symbol combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 15. The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between the combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of benefit, the display combination (storage area) and the number of payouts.

  In this embodiment, when the combination of the symbols displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the combination of the symbols specified in the symbol combination table. It is determined to be a prize. Then, when it is determined to be a winning, the player is given a privilege such as the payout of medals and the operation of replay. If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called "loss". That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination of "loss" is defined by not defining the symbol combination corresponding to "loss" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and an item of "loss" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define "loss".

  The various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table is data for identifying the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line. The "data" in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (content of display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

  Further, data of “storage area” in the display combination column is data for specifying a display combination storage area (see FIG. 41 described later) in which a corresponding display combination is stored. In the present embodiment, 25 display combination storage areas are provided. And in this embodiment, the bit pattern (data pattern of 1 byte) is the same, and the display combination with different contents is managed as another display combination according to the difference of "storage area".

  The numerical values described in the payout amount column in the symbol combination table indicate the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which one or more numerical values are given as data of "the number of payouts", the medals of the same number as the numerical values are paid out.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, when the number of inserted medals is three and one of “C_13_BEL_A” to “C_13_BEL_AP” is determined as the display combination, thirteen medals are determined. It will be paid out. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, when the number of inserted medals is three and any one of "C_14_BEL_A" to "C_14_BEL_L" is determined as a display combination, payout of 14 medals is performed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”, “C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E” to “C_BAR_E”, “C_BBB_A” to “C_BBB_A” to “C_BNS_Z” that are display symbols related to replay (replay) "C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", "C_CU_REP_A", "C_CU_REP_B", "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_A", "C_CD_REP_I", "C_O_C_REPA" When any one of “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” is determined, the replay (replay) is activated.

  In addition, the display combination according to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" shown in FIG. 15 is a combination that may be displayed when the display combination according to "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D" can not be established (dropped). is there. The display combinations related to “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” are display combinations serving as an opportunity when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state described later.

[Bonus activated table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the bonus operation table will be described. The bonus operation time table stores data stored in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), the bonus end number counter, the possible game number counter, and the possible game number counter, provided in the main RAM 95 when the bonus operation is performed. It specifies.

  The game state flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game to be activated. In the present embodiment, a middle bonus and a challenge bonus are provided as types of bonus games. The middle bonus is a so-called feature continuous operating device related to a so-called second type special role, and is hereinafter referred to as "MB". The challenge bonus is what is called a so-called second type special role, and is hereinafter referred to as "CB". The actuation of the CB takes place continuously while the actuation of the MB is taking place.

  The bonus end number counter is data for managing whether or not a specified number (disbursed number) serving as a trigger for ending the bonus game has been reached. In the present embodiment, the operations of MB1 and MB2, which are started upon the display of "C_MB1" or "C_MB2", end when the payout of medals reaching the prescribed number "13" is performed.

  The possible game number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can be played in the operation of “CB”, that is, the number of possible games. The operation of "CB" ends when one game is played.

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence between the transition condition of the RT gaming state and the RT gaming state of the transition source and the transition destination.

  In this embodiment, as the RT gaming state, five types of states of RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state are provided, in which the type of internal winning combination of replay and the winning probability thereof are different from each other. And in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, it is RT game that the symbol combination which concerns on a predetermined internal winning combination is stopped-displayed on the effective line (a predetermined display combination was realized). It becomes a transition trigger between states.

  Specifically, when the display combination according to “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_A”, “C_CU_REP_A”, and “C_CU_REP_B” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. In this case, the migration source (RT gaming state before transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state.

  Also, when the display combination according to “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state. In this case, the migration source (RT gaming state before shifting) is any one of the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state.

  In addition, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state when the display combination according to "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z", "C_SBB_A" to "C_SBB_D", and "C_Koyama REP_A" to "C_Koyama REP_F" is established. Do. Note that the migration source in this case (RT gaming state before shifting) is any one of RT0 gaming state to RT2 gaming state and RT4 gaming state.

  Also, when the display combination according to “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state. In this case, the migration source (RT gaming state before transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Then, when the display combination according to “C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E” is established, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. In this case, the migration source (RT gaming state before transition) is any one of the RT1 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state.

  In the Pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) controls the transition of the RT gaming state with reference to the RT transition table, but for details of the transition flow of the RT gaming state, A more specific description will be given later with reference to FIG.

[Internal lottery table determination table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines the correspondence among the gaming state, the number of inserted medals, the internal lottery table, and the number of times of lottery.

  Specifically, when in the normal gaming state (MB gaming state), the internal lottery table for normal gaming state is used, and "42" is set as the number of times of lottery. In the present embodiment, in the MB (CB) gaming state, all small winning combinations (internal winning combinations associated with medal payouts) are determined as internal winning combinations. That is, the bits related to all the small winning combinations in the internal winning combination storing area described later are turned on. Also, the winning of "MB1" and "MB2" is invalidated.

  In this embodiment, the internal lottery table for the normal gaming state is used in the MB (CB) gaming state. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to be provided with an internal lottery table used in the normal gaming state and an internal lottery table used in the MB (CB) gaming state.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal lottery table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer associated with the winning number in each RT gaming state, and the lottery value when each winning number is determined. .

  The small part and replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are data acquired as a result of the lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and are defined by the internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 24 to 28) described later. Data for specifying the internal winning combination.

  In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical value range “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values defined in accordance with the respective winning numbers. And. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether the result of subtraction is negative (whether so-called "worried" has occurred). That is, it means that the winning number is obtained when the result of the subtraction becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), and the data point assigned to the winning number is obtained.

  Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value is, the higher the probability that the data to which it is assigned (that is, the data pointer) is determined. In addition, the winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “lottery value corresponding to each winning number / number of all random values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)”.

  FIG. 19 shows a general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0). The internal lottery table for the normal gaming state is a table to be referred to in the case of the RT0 gaming state, and defines the lottery value and the data pointer according to the winning numbers 1 to 42.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery value is defined in accordance with the settings 1 to 6. The settings 1 to 6 are provided to adjust the expected value of the internal winnings such as a bonus or a small winning combination on the game arcade side, and, for example, a reset switch (not shown) and a key type switch for setting (not shown) It is changed using.

  For example, with reference to the general gaming state internal lottery table, the probability that the winning number "1" (abbreviated "F_NMLRP1") is won in setting 6 is 7000/65536. Then, when the winning number “1” is won, “1” is acquired as a small winning combination / replay data pointer. The small part / replay data pointer “1” corresponds to abbreviations “C_C_REP” and “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”.

  In addition, in the internal lottery table for the ordinary gaming state, winning numbers "12" (abbreviated "F_R1_R2_KP"), "13" (abbreviated "F_R1_KP_R2"), "19" (abbreviated "F_KP_R4_R2_1") to "22" (abbreviated "F_KP_R2_R4_2") The lottery value of “) is“ 0 ”. Therefore, the winning numbers "12", "13", and "19" to "22" are not won when the internal gaming table for the normal gaming state is referred to.

  When the winning numbers "12", "13" and "19" to "22" are won, "12", "13" and "19" to "22" are acquired as the small part and replay data pointers, Internal winning combinations associated with “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” are determined (see FIG. 26 described later). Therefore, when in the RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combinations associated with "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" are never determined, and there is no transition from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

  FIG. 20 shows an internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state. The RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is a table to be referred to when the RT1 gaming state is established, and defines a lottery value and a data pointer according to winning numbers "1" to "24". When in the RT1 gaming state, the lottery value defined in accordance with the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal gaming table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number for the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table. It changes to the lottery value specified according to "1"-"24".

  For example, in the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “19” and “21” are “3750”, respectively. As described above, when any of the small part and replay data pointers "19" to "22" defined according to the winning numbers "19" to "22" is acquired, "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" Internal winning combination will be determined. Therefore, in the case of the RT1 gaming state, there is a possibility that an internal winning combination associated with “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” may be determined, and there may be transition from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

  FIG. 21 shows an internal lottery table for the RT2 gaming state. The RT2 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to when the RT2 gaming state is established, and defines a lottery value and a data pointer according to the winning numbers "1" to "24". When in the RT2 gaming state, the lottery value defined in accordance with the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal gaming table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number for the RT2 gaming state internal lottery table. It changes to the lottery value specified according to "1"-"24".

  For example, in the RT2 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of winning numbers "14" and "16" are "10000", and the lottery values of winning numbers "15" and "17" are "6000", respectively. It is. Further, the lottery value of the winning number “18” is “10846”.

  When any of the small part and replay data pointers "14" to "18" defined according to the winning numbers "14" to "18" is acquired, "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_Z", "C_SBB_A" to " An internal winning combination associated with “C_SBB_D” is determined (see FIG. 25). Therefore, in the case of RT2 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination according to "C_BNS_A"-"C_BNS_Z" and "C_SBB_A"-"C_SBB_D" may be determined, and transition from RT2 gaming state to RT3 gaming state There is.

  FIG. 22 shows the internal lottery table for the RT3 gaming state. The RT3 gaming state internal lottery table is a table to be referred to when the RT3 gaming state is established, and defines a lottery value and a data pointer according to the winning numbers "1" to "24". When in the RT3 gaming state, the lottery value defined in accordance with the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal gaming table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number for the RT3 gaming state internal lottery table. It changes to the lottery value specified according to "1"-"24".

  For example, in the RT3 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of winning numbers "20" and "22" are "5000", and the lottery values of winning numbers "23" and "24" are "8000", respectively. It is. When one of the small part and replay data pointers “20” and “22” to “24” defined according to the winning numbers “20” and “22” to “24” is acquired, “C_small Internal winning combinations for V_REP_A to C_small V_REP_C are determined (see FIG. 26). Therefore, when in the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility that an internal winning combination related to "C_small V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C" may be determined, and the RT3 gaming state may be shifted to the RT4 gaming state. .

  In addition, when the small part and replay data pointers "20" and "22" defined according to the winning numbers "20" and "22" are acquired, the internal winning combinations pertaining to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" It is determined. Therefore, in the case of the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility that an internal winning combination associated with “C_CD_REP_A” to “C_CD_REP_I” may be determined, and the RT3 gaming state may shift to the RT2 gaming state.

  FIG. 23 shows an internal lottery table for the RT4 gaming state. The RT4 gaming state internal lottery table is a table to be referred to in the RT4 gaming state, and defines a lottery value and a data pointer in accordance with the winning numbers "1" to "24". When in the RT4 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers "1" to "24" of the internal gaming table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is the winning number for the RT4 gaming state internal lottery table. It changes to the lottery value specified according to "1"-"24".

  For example, in the RT4 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers "12" and "13" are respectively "13000". When the small part and replay data pointers "12" and "13" defined in accordance with the winning numbers "12" and "13" are acquired, the internal winning combinations pertaining to "C_CU_REP_A" and "C_CU_REP_B" are determined. Ru. Therefore, when in the RT4 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combinations associated with "C_CU_REP_A" and "C_CU_REP_B" may be determined, and there may be a transition from the RT4 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

  In addition, when the small part and replay data pointers "12" and "13" defined according to the winning numbers "12" and "13" are acquired, the internal winning combinations pertaining to "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" It is determined. Therefore, in the case of the RT4 gaming state, there is a possibility that an internal winning combination associated with "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" may be determined, and the RT4 gaming state may be shifted to the RT2 gaming state.

  The winning numbers "28" to "33" in the internal lottery table for RT0 gaming state shown in FIG. 19 may be won in any gaming state from RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state, and the lottery value is Each is "2930". When the small part / replay data pointers "28" to "33" defined according to the winning numbers "28" to "33" are acquired, the internal winning combinations pertaining to "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H" are determined. Ru.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that an internal winning combination associated with “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” may be determined in any of the gaming states of RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state. Therefore, there may be transition from RT1 gaming state, RT2 gaming state, RT3 gaming state and RT4 gaming state to RT0 gaming state.

[Internal winning combination decision table]
Next, the internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely acquired.

  “Internal winning combination” in the internal winning combination determination table is data for identifying a combination of symbols on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R which permits display along the effective line. "Internal winning combination" is represented by 1-byte data, as with "display combination" in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 15, and a unique symbol for each bit in the 1-byte data. A combination of is assigned. The “o” mark in the internal winning combination determination table indicates an internal winning combination to be won in the acquired data pointer.

  In addition, when the data pointer for small part and replay and the data pointer for bonus are "0", the content of "internal winning combination" is "loss", but this is the symbol combination table shown in FIG. 12 to FIG. Indicates that the display of all symbol combinations defined by is not permitted.

  FIG. 24 shows a bonus internal winning combination determination table. The bonus internal winning combination determination table defines an internal winning combination relating to the operation of the bonus game for “1” of the bonus data pointer. That is, the bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the internal winning combination relating to the operation of the bonus game. As shown in FIG. 24, for example, when “1” is acquired as the bonus data pointer, “C_MB1” and “C_MB2” are won as internal winning combinations.

  FIG. 25 to FIG. 28 show an internal winning combination determination table for small part and replay. The internal winning combination determination table for the small winning combination / replay defines the internal winning combination pertaining to the small winning combination and the replay (replay) for “1” to “42” of the small winning combination / replay data pointer. That is, the internal winning combination determination table for the small winning combination / replay defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the internal winning combination pertaining to the payout of the medal or the internal winning combination pertaining to the operation of the replay.

  For example, when “17” is acquired as a small part / replay data pointer, “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”, “C_C_REP”, “C_Oyama_REP_A” to “C_Oyama” as internal winning combinations. _REP_F is won successfully. In addition, when “18” is acquired as a small part / replay data pointer, “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”, “C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”, “C_ Oyama” as internal winning combinations. _REP_A "to" C_Oyama _REP_F "," C_small V_REP_A "to" C_small V_REP_C "are won successfully.

[Roller stop number selection table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the rotation stop number selection table will be described. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the rotation stop number. The spinning stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process described later.

  The rotation stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines a rotation stop number different for each data pointer. For example, when the small part and replay data pointer is "3", the rotation stop number "3" is selected. When the bonus data pointer is "1", the rotation stop number "67" is selected.

  The symbol 1 in the number selection table for turning off shown in FIG. 29 is in the MB gaming state (CB gaming state), and the data pointers for small part and replay are “0” and “25 to 41”. Indicates the case. In this case, the rotation stop number "42" is selected. Further, 1 and 2 in the US in the number selection table for turning off shown in FIG. 29 indicate the case of being in the MB gaming state (CB gaming state). For example, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is “1” during the MB gaming state, the rotation stop number “43” is selected.

  Note that although the rotation cylinder stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines different rotation cylinder stop numbers for each of the small winning combination / replay data pointers, the present invention is not limited to this. In the rotary drum stop number selection table according to the present invention, the same rotary drum stop number may be defined for different small combination / replay data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel Stop Initial Setting Table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. The reel stop initial setting table defines the correspondence between the rotation stop number and various data used in the pull-in priority order table selection process described later and the process of determining the number of sliding symbols of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes a rotation stop number, pull-in priority table selection table number, pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, forward push The correspondence between the table change initial data and the irregular push table selection data is defined.

  The drawing priority order table selection table number and the drawing priority order table number are data used for the drawing priority order table selection process. For example, in the reel stop initial setting table, if the draw-in priority table number corresponding to the spinning stop number is specified, the pull-in priority table number specified in the draw-in priority table (see FIG. 37) is corresponded. It is possible to obtain data on the priority of the display combination.

  Also, in the reel stop initialization table, if the draw-in priority table number corresponding to the rotation stop number is not defined, the draw-in priority table is selected with reference to the draw-in priority table selection table (see FIG. 36). A drawing priority order table number corresponding to the table number is determined.

  The forward press table selection data, the forward press table change data, and the forward press table change initial data are used to specify the stop table (see FIGS. 32 to 34) to be referred to when the forward press is performed. It is data. In the present embodiment, the “forward push” is a stop operation when the first stop operation (the first stop operation) is performed on the left reel 3L, and more specifically, “the left middle It corresponds to the pressing order (stop order) of "right" and "right and left middle". Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when notification of the pressing order (stopping order) performed by combining one of the display on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the sound output from the speakers 20L and 20R is not performed. Stop operation by forward press is recommended.

  The irregular press table selection data is data for specifying a stop table (see FIG. 35) to be referred to when the irregular press is performed. Note that "anomalous push" in the present embodiment is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and "middle left / right", "middle right left", "right middle Corresponding to the order of pressing the "left" and "right and left middle".

  In this embodiment, basically, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped within 190 msec. Specifically, it corresponds to the value obtained by adding one of the number of sliding symbols “0” to “4” to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the relevant reel when the stop operation is detected. The symbol position is determined as a symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped (this is referred to as a "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position at which the stop of the rotation of the reel is started, which is referred to as "stop start position".

  That is, the number of sliding symbols is the amount of rotation of the reel from when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S to when the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped. In other words, it is the number of symbols passing through the middle step area of the corresponding reel of the display window 4 in the period from when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S to when the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S.

  Referring to the stop table, the number of sliding symbols is obtained according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding symbols is acquired based on the stop table, but this is a temporary one, and the acquired number of sliding symbols does not immediately determine the planned stop position of the reel.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when there is a more appropriate number of sliding symbols than the number of sliding symbols (hereinafter referred to as “sliding number determination data”) acquired based on a stop table described later, a drawing priority order table described later The number of sliding symbols is changed with reference to (see FIG. 37). The sliding symbol number determination data is referred to determine the search order when comparing the priorities for each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position four symbols ahead, which is the maximum sliding symbol number.

  In the present embodiment, the stop table to be referred to is used properly depending on the forward press and the irregular press. In the case of the forward press, the forward press first stop stop table (see FIG. 32) and the forward press second and third stop tables (see FIG. 34) are referred to. On the other hand, if the irregular pressing is performed, the irregular pressing time stop table (see FIG. 35) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop at first press]
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the stop table for the first push first stop will be described. The forward press first stop stop table shown in FIG. 32 is referred to when the forward press table selection data is “01”. The stop table for the first press at the first stop defines the correspondence between the stop start positions “0” to “20” of the left reel 3L, the sliding symbol number determination data, and the change status.

  For example, if the stop start position of the left reel 3L is "15", the sliding piece number determination data becomes "0" and the change status becomes "1". The change status is used when referring to a forward push control change table (see FIG. 33) described later.

[Order change control control table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the forward push control change table will be described. The forward push control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (the planned stop position of the left reel 3L), the change status, the change status, and the forward push second and third stop stop table numbers.

For example, if the change status acquired based on the first push stop table for first push (see FIG. 32) is “1” and the planned stop position of the left reel 3L is “15”, the change status is “ The stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing becomes “12”.
In the forward push control change table, when the change status and the forward push second and third stop stop table numbers are not registered in the target position, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stops when pressing forward and stop table with irregular pressing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. 35, the stop table for the second and third stops during the forward press and the stop table for the irregular press will be described. The first and second stop tables and the abnormal stop table define one byte of stop data according to each of the symbol positions “0” to “20”.

  In addition, the stop table for the second and third stops for forward pressing shown in FIG. 34 is referred to when the stop table number for the second and third stops for forward pressing is “08”. Further, the irregular push time stop table shown in FIG. 35 is referred to when the irregular push time table selection data is “07”.

  Is stop data specified in each stop table of the second and third stop stop tables and abnormal stop table at the time of forward pressing appropriate as the position where the symbol position to which it is associated is to stop the rotation of the reel? It has the information of no. Then, this stop data is information on whether or not the corresponding symbol position is suitable as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, and a row of bits corresponding to the row of “A line” and “B line” in each stop table Allocate to the bit corresponding to. Further, the stop data is defined by assigning information as to which of the two types of information to be adopted to the bit corresponding to the “line change” column in each stop table.

  That is, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the abnormal stop table for forward pressing define a plurality of ways of determining the position at which to stop the rotation of the reel. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, it is possible to make the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped different, based on the stop position at the first stop and the like. By adopting such a configuration, compression of information can be achieved.

  The determination of the number of sliding symbols determination data is performed as follows. First, according to the type of stop button in which the stop operation is detected, it is designated which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to the bit 1) constituting the stop data. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, a column of "middle reel A line data" of bit 4 is designated.

  Then, with reference to the designated bit string, it is sequentially searched whether "1" is defined as the corresponding data for each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position for which "1" is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and the difference is determined as the number of sliding symbols determination data.

  Note that whether to change the reference bit string from the "A line" column to the "B line" column refers to the "line change" column, and "1" is specified in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is decided by whether it is done or not. Then, when it is determined that the line change is to be performed, thereafter, the column of “B line” is designated, and the above search is performed.

[Import priority table selection table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a leading priority table selection table will be described. The drawing priority order table selection table defines the correspondence between the combination of the drawing priority order table selection table number and the pressing order of the stop button, and the drawing priority order table number in each combination.
The drawing priority order table number is data for acquiring information on the priority of the display combination defined in the drawing priority order table (see FIG. 37).

  When the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time, the data in the "left reel first stop" column in the pull-in priority order table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time, and the pull-in priority order table selection table number is “1”, “00” is acquired as the lead-in priority order table number. Then, even when the middle reel 3C is pressed at the second stop and the right reel 3R is pressed at the second stop, "00" is maintained as the lead-in priority order table number.

  Further, in the drawing priority order table selection table, when the drawing priority order table number is not registered at the target position, the number indicated in the right column of the right reel first stop column is the drawing priority order table number. It is acquired as For example, when the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time and the drawing priority order table selection table number is “0”, the drawing priority order table number is not registered at the target position. Therefore, in this case, the right column of the right reel first stop column corresponding to the drawing priority order table selection table number “0” is referred to, and “00” is acquired as the drawing priority order table number.

[Import priority table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the drawing priority order table will be described. The pull-in priority order table defines the correspondence between pull-in data for each storage area type and the predetermined priority in each of the pull-in priority table numbers “00” to “04”.

  In addition to the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table, the drawing priority order table is used to search whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces. The priority order is data that defines the order in which the stop display (pulled in) is preferentially given among the types of combinations of symbols related to winning. In addition, each pull-in data is 1 as in the case of “internal winning combination” in the internal winning combination determination table shown in FIGS. 24 to 28 and “display combination” in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 15. It is represented by byte data, and a unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit in the 1-byte data.

  In the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding symbols is acquired based on the above-described forward-pushing first stop table (see FIG. 32). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. That is, in the present embodiment, the more appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols for permitting the stop display by the internal winning combination regardless of the number of sliding symbols acquired by the stop table.

  In the present embodiment, the stop display (retraction) of the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination with higher priority is prioritized over the stop display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination with lower priority. To be done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, not only the priority of the internal winning combination differs according to the pull-in priority table number but also the number of divisions of the priority. Specifically, when the drawing priority order table numbers are "01", "03" and "04", the number of divisions of priority is set to 3, and the drawing priority order table numbers "00" and "02". In this case, the division number of the priority is set to one.

Here, in order to simplify the description, the priority when the pull-in priority table number is “01” will be described, and the description of the priority in other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted.
For priority "1" when the attraction priority table number is "01", "C_BAR_A", "C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_3_BEL_B1" to "C_3_BEL_B8", and "C_3_BEL_C1" to "C_4_C_4" The withdrawal data corresponding to is defined.

  The priority "2" when the attraction priority table number is "01" corresponds to "C_BAR_B", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_C", and "C_B_REP_H" to "C_B_REP_J". Data is defined.

  The priority "3" when the pull-in priority table number is "01" is "C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H", "C_BAR_C" to "C_BAR_E", "C_B_REP_D" to "C_B_REP_G", and "C_B_REP_K" The import data corresponding to “C_B_REP_P” is defined.

[Search order table]
Next, the search order table will be described with reference to FIG. The search order table is an order (hereinafter referred to as “search order”) to be preferentially applied from a range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding symbols (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding symbols is 4) ").

  The search order table defines sliding piece number determination data obtained based on the above-described stop table, and its search order. That is, in the present embodiment, the order of numerical values to be preferentially applied is determined based on the sliding piece number determination data. Further, the search order table is provided on the assumption that there is a plurality of sliding pieces having the same priority, and is configured to apply a higher order search order.

  In the present embodiment, as described in the priority attraction-in control process of FIG. 93 described later, each numerical value is searched sequentially from the lower search order “5” of the search order table to cope with the search order “1”. The number of sliding pieces is given priority from the numerical value of

[Game lock lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the game lock lottery table will be described.
The game lock lottery table defines the lottery value of the winning game lock according to the winning number related to the internal lottery during the RT4 gaming state. The game lock in the present embodiment is generated during the game. Specifically, when the start operation (the pressing operation on the start lever 16) is detected, the occurrence of the game lock is randomly selected, and when the occurrence of the game lock is determined, the game lock occurs. While the game lock is occurring, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed even if the closing operation or the closing operation is performed.

  In the game lock lottery process of the present embodiment, basically, the effect random number value (random number denominator = 65536) extracted from the predetermined numerical value range “0 to 65535” is subtracted by the specified lottery value. Do. And. The lottery is performed by determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called "worried" has occurred). In other words, the game lock is won when the result of the subtraction becomes less than 0.

  The game lock lottery table shown in FIG. 39 is a lottery value for winning the game lock when the winning number is “36” (abbreviated “F_strong angle Choi”) to “41” (abbreviated “F_reach eyes”). To define. That is, in the present embodiment, when the winning number is “33” to “41”, it is randomly determined whether or not to execute the game lock. For example, when the winning number is “37” (abbreviated “F_middle check”), the game lock is won (executed) with the probability of 32768/65536.

[Symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table will be described.
The symbol corresponding prize operation flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the data of the internal winning combinations that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the prize judgment line. That is, by referring to the symbol corresponding prize operation flag data table, it is possible to determine the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time. The symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15).

  For example, when the symbol "rip" is stopped and displayed on the winning determination line of the left reel 3L, display is possible in the storage area 1 to 25 corresponding to the symbol code "00000001" (rip) in the reel type "left". "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the internal winning combination. The data defined in the symbol-corresponding winning operation flag data table is ANDed with the data stored in a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) described later and stored.

<Configuration of Storage Area Provided in Main RAM>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46, configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 95 will be described. Although not described here (not shown), the main RAM 95 is also provided with storage areas such as various control data, various flags, and various counters used in the various reel effects described above.

[Display combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storing area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the display combination storage area is configured by display combination storage areas 1 to 26 each represented by 1-byte data.

  In each of the display combination storing areas 1 to 26, when "1" is set (stored) in a predetermined bit, a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the effective line Indicates On the other hand, when all the bits are “0”, it indicates that the combination of symbols relating to winning is not displayed on the effective line.

  Further, the main RAM 95 is provided with an internal winning combination storing area (not shown). The internal winning combination storing area is configured similarly to the display combination storing area shown in FIG. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 26, when "1" is set in a plurality of bits, display of a combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. Also, when all the bits are "0", the content of the internal winning combination is "loss".

  Further, the main RAM 95 is provided with a carryover combination storage area (not shown). When "C_MB1" and "C_MB2" are determined as internal winning combinations as a result of the internal lottery, the internal winning combinations are stored as a carryover combination in the carryover combination storage area. The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is not cleared until the corresponding symbol combination (eg, "rip"-"rip"-"bell 2" of "C_MB1") is displayed on the prize determination line Will be held by Then, while the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storing area, the carryover combination is stored in the internal combination combination storing area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Playing state flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the gaming state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG.
The gaming state flag storage area is configured of gaming state flag storage areas 1 and 2 represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the gaming state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the gaming state flag storage area 1-2.

  When “1” is stored (stands up) in a predetermined bit in each of the gaming state flag storage areas 1 and 2, an operation of a bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is performed. Indicates For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area 1, the operation of the MB ("C_MB1" or "C_MB2") is performed, and the gaming state is the MB gaming state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described.
The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of one byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

  For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Also, for example, in the case where the left stop button 17L is not yet pressed, that is, a valid stop button, “1” is stored in the bit 4. The main CPU 93 identifies the stop button pressed this time and the stop button not yet pressed based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Pressing order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG.
The pressing order storage area stores a pressing order flag consisting of one byte. In the pressing order flag, the type of pressing order of the stop button is assigned to each bit. For example, when the pressing order of the stop button is “left middle right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Symbol code storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described. The symbol code storage area stores the symbol code (symbol code storage area 1) of the symbol of the reel most recently stopped and operated and the displayable combinations (symbol code storage areas 2 to 29) for each valid line. Ru. In addition, after all the reels stop, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 26.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the prize operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read out from the symbol corresponding prize operation flag data table (see FIG. 40), and the prize operation flag AND the data with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the logically ANDed data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. When a plurality of valid lines are provided, symbol code storage areas equal in number to the number of valid lines are provided.

[Import priority data storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the configuration of the leading priority data storage area will be described. The drawing priority order data storage area includes a left reel drawing priority order data storage area, a middle reel drawing priority order data storage area, and a right reel drawing priority order data storage area. That is, in the pull-in priority order data storage area, a storage area of priority order data is provided for each type of reel.

  In each drawing priority order data storage area, drawing priority order data determined according to each symbol position “0” to “20” of the corresponding reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to the drawing priority order data storage area, it is searched whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding symbols in addition to the number of sliding symbols determined based on the above-described stop table.

  The contents of priority attraction-in data stored in the attraction-priority data storage area differ depending on the type of attraction-priority table number in the attraction-priority table (refer to FIG. 37) referred to in determining the attraction-priority data. . Further, the higher the value of the attraction priority data, the higher the priority.

  By referring to the retraction priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priorities among the symbols arranged on the circumferential surface of the reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the drawing priority order data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the circumferential surface of the reel. When there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the draw-in priority order data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined by the above-mentioned search order table (see FIG. 38).

  Although detailed description is omitted in the present specification, various table data (for example, a navigation table etc.) necessary for various rendering operations are also stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 76, and various items necessary for the sub RAM 103 are also stored. A storage area is provided as appropriate.

<Transition flow of gaming state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the transition flow of the gaming state between “RT0 gaming state” to “RT3 gaming state” and “BB gaming state” controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, five types of gaming states “RT0 gaming state” to “RT4 gaming state” are provided as the RT gaming state. Then, the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) controls the transition between “RT0 gaming state” and “RT4 gaming state” by referring to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17).

First, at the time of shipping, the gaming state is "RT0 gaming state". Next, in the “RT0 gaming state”, when the combination of symbols relating to the “bell spilled eyes” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to the “RT1 gaming state”. In addition, in the “RT2 gaming state”, “RT3 gaming state” or “RT4 gaming state”, the gaming state is also “RT1 gaming state”, even when a combination of symbols related to “bell spilled eyes” is displayed on the winning determination line. Transition to
“Bell spilled eyes” in the present embodiment is a displayer of “C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H” shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in the “RT3 gaming state” or the “RT4 gaming state”, the gaming state shifts to the “RT1 gaming state” also when a combination of symbols relating to the “push order lip A” is displayed on the winning determination line.
The “push order rep A” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_CU_REP_A” and “C_CU_REP_B” shown in FIG.

In the “RT1 gaming state”, when the combination of symbols relating to the “pushing order lip B” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to the “RT2 gaming state”. Also, in the “RT3 gaming state” or the “RT4 gaming state”, the gaming state shifts to the “RT2 gaming state” also when a combination of symbols relating to the “pushing order lip B” is displayed on the winning determination line.
The "push order rep B" in this embodiment is a display combination of "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I" shown in FIG.

In the “RT2 gaming state”, when a combination of symbols relating to “BB / RB lip” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to “RT3 gaming state”.
“BB / RB rep” in the present embodiment is a display combination of “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z” and “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D” shown in FIG. 12.

In the “RT3 gaming state”, when the combination of symbols relating to the “push order lip C” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to the “RT4 gaming state”. In addition, in the “RT1 gaming state” or the “RT2 gaming state”, the gaming state shifts to the “RT4 gaming state” also when a combination of symbols relating to the “push order lip C” is displayed on the winning determination line.
The "push order rep C" in this embodiment is a display combination of "C_small V_REP_A" to "C_small V_REP_C" shown in FIG.

In the "RT1 gaming state", "RT2 gaming state", "RT3 gaming state" or "RT4 gaming state", when a combination of symbols relating to "lower bell" is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state is " It shifts to "RT0 gaming state".
The "lower bell" in the present embodiment is a display combination of "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E" shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the first ART is executed in the “RT3 gaming state”, and the second ART is executed in the “RT4 gaming state”. The “RT3 gaming state” is shifted when the display combination of “C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z” and “C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D” is established during the RT2 gaming state. For example, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS_A" is "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7". That is, a combination of symbols by a design based on the numeral "7" (others may be a design with superior visibility compared to other symbols) which is usually adopted as a combination of symbols relating to the operation of a bonus When the stop display is performed, the gaming state shifts to the “RT3 gaming state”, and the first ART is executed. Therefore, the first ART executed during the RT3 gaming state is referred to as "simulated bonus".

  In the present embodiment, when the execution of the first ART is determined in the RT1 gaming state, the stop order for displaying the combination of symbols relating to the “push order lip B” on the winning determination line (display assistance Informing the information), it waits for the combination of symbols relating to "push order lip B" to be displayed on the prize determination line. After that, when the combination of symbols relating to “push order lip B” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from “RT1 gaming state” to “RT2 gaming state”.

  Then, in the “RT2 gaming state”, display supplementary information for displaying a combination of symbols relating to “BB / RB lip” on the winning determination line is notified. Thereafter, when the combination of symbols relating to "BB / RB lip" is displayed on the prize determination line, the gaming state shifts from "RT2 gaming state" to "RT3 gaming state". Thereby, the first ART (simulated bonus) is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when execution of the second ART is determined in the “RT1 gaming state”, the “RT2 gaming state” or the “RT3 gaming state”, the symbol pertaining to the “push order lip C” The stop order (display auxiliary information) for displaying the combination on the winning determination line is notified. Then, it waits for the combination of symbols relating to the "push order lip C" to be displayed on the prize determination line. Thereafter, when a combination of symbols relating to "push order lip C" is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts to "RT4 gaming state". Thereby, the second ART (simulated bonus) is executed.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination and stop order]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the stop order will be described.
FIG. 48 is a correspondence table between the internal winning combination and the stop order, showing the type of display combination according to the stop order.

  “C_CU_REP” described in FIG. 48 indicates a display combination (“C_CU_REP_A”, “C_CU_REP_B”) in which transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined. And "C_CD_REP" has shown the display combination ("C_CD_REP_A"-"C_CD_REP_I") by which transfer to RT2 gaming state is determined. In addition, “normally rep” indicates a display combination (“C_C_REP”, “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P”) related to re-playing regardless of the transition of the gaming state.

  Furthermore, “C_BNS” indicates a display combination (“C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_Z”) in which transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. In addition, when "C_BNS * 1" performs stop control using a stop table, "C_BNS_A" is most easily displayed, and "C_BNS_O" to "C_BNS_T" are not displayed. In addition, when "C_BNS ※ 2" performs stop control using the stop table, "C_BNS_O" is most easily displayed, and "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_N" and "C_BNS_U" to "C_BNS_Z" are not displayed.

  “C_SBB” indicates a display combination (“C_SBB_A” to “C_SBB_D”) in which transition to the RT3 gaming state (first ART) is determined. And "C_small V" has shown the display combination ("C_small V_REP_A"-"C_small V_REP_C") by which the transition to RT4 gaming state (2nd ART) is determined.

  “C_3_BEL” indicates display combinations (“C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_BEL_B8”, “C_3_BEL_C8” to “C_3_BEL_C4”) to “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_BEL_C1” to “C_3_BEL_C1”. When "C_3_BEL" is established, three medals are paid out. Similarly to "C_3_BEL", "C_9_BEL" indicates a display combination ("C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") which is not involved in the transition of the gaming state. When "C_9_BEL" is established, nine medals are paid out.

  “C_ONE” indicates a display combination (“C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E”) in which the transition to the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) is determined. “C_HAZ” indicates a display combination (“C_HAZ_A” to “C_HAZ_H”) in which transition to the RT1 gaming state is determined.

  Also, "C_13_BEL" indicates a display combination ("C_13_BEL_A" to "C_13_BEL_AP") not related to the transition of the gaming state, "C_14_BEL" indicates a display combination not related to the transition of the gaming state ("C_14_BEL_A" to " C_14_BEL_K ") is shown. When "C_13_BEL" is established, 13 medals are paid out, and when "C_14_BEL" is established, 14 medals are paid out.

  In the MB gaming state, either "C_13_BEL" or "C_14_BEL" can be established, and the process is ended by the payout of more than 13 medals. For example, when "C_14_BEL" is established in the first game in the MB gaming state, the MB gaming state ends in that game. As a result, the player obtains 11 medals (14 (the number of payouts)-3 (the number of inserted sheets) = 11 (the number of acquired sheets)) medals.

  On the other hand, when "C_13_BEL" is established in the first game and "C_14_BEL" is established in the second game during the MB gaming state, the player has 21 sheets (27 (the number of payouts)-6 (the number of inserted sheets) = 21 (the number of inserted sheets). You can earn medals))). In the MB gaming state, winning numbers "1" (number stop "43"), "4" (number stop "46"), "19" (number stop "61") , “21” (rotation stop number “63”), “C_14_BEL” is established in the first game.

  In the present embodiment, combinations of various symbols related to “B_CU_REP”, “C_CD_REP”, etc., and combinations of various symbols related to “BELL” such as “C_ONE”, “C_3_BEL”, “C_9_BEL”, etc. The pressing order (stopping order) is set for the success or failure of the stop display of.

  For example, in the non-MB gaming state, when the data pointer for small part and replay is "12", "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P", "C_CU_REP_A", "C_CU_REP_B" and "C_C_REP_A" to "C_CU_REP_B" as "internal winning combination" C_CD_REP_A to C_CD_REP_I are won. Also, in the non-MB gaming state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "12", "12" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, "C_CU_REP" (either "C_CU_REP_A" or "C_CU_REP_B") on the condition that the stop order by pressing the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is "left middle right" or "left right middle". The combination of symbols pertaining to is displayed stopped.
In addition, the combination of symbols related to "C_CD_REP" (any of "C_CD_REP_A" to "C_CD_REP_I") is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "middle left and right" or "middle right left".
In addition, the combination of symbols pertaining to "ordinary rep" (any of "C_C_REP", "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P") is stopped on condition that the stop order is "right / left middle" or "right middle left". Be done.

  In the non-MB gaming state, when the data pointer for small role and replay is "14", "C_BNS_A" to "C_BNS_J", "C_BNS_O" to "C_BNS_T", "C_BNS_Y" and "C_C_REP" as internal winning combinations. “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P” and “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_F” are won. Also, in the non-MB gaming state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "14", "14" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, on the condition that the stop order by pressing the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is "middle left or right" or "middle right left", "normal rep"("C_C_REP","C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P" The symbol combination according to any of) is stopped and displayed.
In addition, the combination of symbols pertaining to any of “C_BNS ※ 1” (“C_BNS_A” to “C_BNS_J”, “C_BNS_Y”) stops on condition that the stop order is “left middle right” or “right left middle”. Is displayed.
In addition, if the stop order is “right / left middle” or “right middle left” and the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing (correct), “C_BNS ※ 2” (any of “C_BNS_O” to “C_BNS_T” The combination of the symbols pertaining to?) Is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the timing of stop operation is not predetermined | prescribed timing (correct answer), the combination of the symbol which concerns on "C_ Koyama REP_A"-"C_ Koyama REP_F" is stopped-displayed.

  In the non-MB gaming state, when the data pointer for small role and replay is “25”, “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D” to “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4” and “C_3_BEL_B1” to “C_3_EL_B” as internal winning combinations. “C_3_BEL_C1” to “C_3_BEL_C4” and “C_ONE_A” to “C_ONE_E” are won. Also, in the non-MB gaming state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "25", "25" is determined as the rotation stop number.

In this case, "C_3_BEL"("C_3_BEL_A1" to "C_3_BEL_A4", "C_3_BEL_B1", "C_3_BEL_B1") on the condition that the stop order by pressing the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is "left middle right" or "right and left middle". The symbol combination according to any one of “C_3_BEL_B8” and “C_3_BEL_C1” to “C_3_BEL_C4” is stopped and displayed.
In addition, the symbol combination relating to "C_9_BEL" (any one of "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "middle left and right" and "middle right left".
In addition, a combination of symbols related to "C_ONE" (any of "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E") is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "right and left middle" or "right, middle and left".

  In the non-MB gaming state, when the data pointer for small role and replay is “28”, “C_9_BEL_A” to “C_9_BEL_D”, “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”, “C_CHN_A”, “C_ONE_A” as internal winning combinations. ~ "C_ONE_E" wins. Further, in the non-MB gaming state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "28", "28" is determined as the rotation stop number.

  In this case, if the stop order by pressing the stop button 17L, 17C, 17R is "left middle right" or "right and left middle" and the press timing of the stop button for the rotating reel is a predetermined timing (correct) , “C_3_BEL” (any of “C_3_BEL_A1” to “C_3_BEL_A4”), the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, if the stop order is "left middle right" or "right and left middle" and the press timing of the stop button on the rotating reel is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), "C_HAZ" ("C_HAZ_A" to "C_HAZ_H") The symbol combination according to “1” is displayed stopped. As a result, medals are not paid out.

  Therefore, when the stop order is “left middle right” or “right and left middle”, three medals are paid out if the press timing of the stop button is a predetermined timing (correct). Then, if the pressing timing of the stop button is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), the medal is not paid out.

In addition, the symbol combination relating to "C_9_BEL" (any one of "C_9_BEL_A" to "C_9_BEL_D") is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "middle left and right" and "middle right left". As a result, nine medals are paid out.
In addition, a combination of symbols related to "C_ONE" (any of "C_ONE_A" to "C_ONE_E") is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is "right and left middle" or "right, middle and left". As a result, one medal is paid out.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination and stop order and RT transition]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop order, and the RT transition will be described.
FIG. 49 is a correspondence table of internal winning combinations, stop orders, and RT transitions, showing a transition destination of the RT gaming state according to the stop order.

  In the non-MB gaming state, when the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "12", the symbol related to "ordinary rep", provided that the stop order is "right / left middle" or "right middle left". The combination is stopped. Thereby, the transition of the RT gaming state is not performed.

  For example, in the RT4 gaming state (second ART), when the termination of the RT4 gaming state is not determined, a notification (display auxiliary information) is notified that the stop order should be "right / left middle" or "right middle left". Do. As a result, the combination of symbols relating to "normal lip" is stopped and displayed, and the RT4 gaming state is maintained. That is, in order not to shift from the RT4 gaming state (the second ART) to another RT gaming state, it is informed that the stop order should be “right / left middle” or “right middle / left”.

  In the non-MB gaming state, when the data pointer for small part and replay is "14", the condition is "C_BNS (※ 1)" on condition that the stop order is "left middle right" or "right and left middle". The combination of such symbols is stopped and displayed. Thereby, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

  For example, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (the execution of the first ART) is determined, and the "BB flag" or the "BB preparation flag" described later is on, the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right" Informing "Medium" and notifying that it is desirable to aim for the stop display of the combination of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7" (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 1)" is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (※ 1)" (combination of symbols that evokes BB), it is preferable to set the stop order to "left middle right" or "right and left middle", It informs that it is desirable to aim for the stop display of the combination of the symbols of red 7 "-" red 7 "-" red 7 ". In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols related to “C_BNS (* 1)” is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 102 starts the first ART in which the type of pseudo bonus is BB.

  On the other hand, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (the execution of the first ART) is determined, and the "RB flag" or the "RB preparation flag" described later is on, the stop order is "right / left middle" or "right middle Informing the user that it is desirable to aim at the stop display of the combination of the symbols of "red 7"-"red 7"-"red 7" (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 2)" is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_BNS (* 2)" (combination of symbols that evokes RB), it is preferable to set the stop order to "right-left middle" or "right-middle left", It informs that it is desirable to aim for the stop display of the combination of the symbols of red 7 "-" red 7 "-" red 7 ". In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols relating to “C_BNS (* 2)” is stopped and displayed, the sub CPU 102 starts the first ART in which the type of pseudo bonus is RB.

  In the non-MB gaming state, when the data pointer for small part and replay is "18", the combination of symbols pertaining to "C_SBB" on condition that the stop order is "left middle right" or "right and left middle" Is stopped. Thereby, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

  For example, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (the execution of the first ART) is determined, and the "SBB flag" or the "SBB preparation flag" described later is on, the stop order is "left middle right" or "left and right" The display auxiliary information is informed that it is preferable to set the mark to "Medium" and that it is desirable to aim for the stop display of the combination of "white 7"-"white 7"-"white 7". Thereby, the combination of symbols relating to "C_SBB" is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. That is, in order to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" (combination of symbols that evoke SBB), it is preferable to set the stop order to "left middle right" or "right and left middle", and "white 7"- "White 7"-"White 7" informs that it is desirable to aim for the stop display of the combination of symbols.

  On the other hand, when the transition of the RT3 gaming state (execution of the first ART) is determined, and the "SBB flag" or the "SBB preparation flag" is off, the stop order is "middle left / right" or "middle right left" Then, it notifies that it is good (display auxiliary information). As a result, the combination of symbols relating to “normally rep” is stopped and displayed, and the transition of the RT gaming state is not performed. That is, in order not to stop and display the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" (combination of symbols that evoke SBB), it notifies that the stop order should be "middle left and right" or "middle right left".

<Description of sub gaming state>
Here, the sub gaming state will be described.
In the present embodiment, various gaming states related to the effects controlled by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) are referred to as "sub gaming states". In this embodiment, as a sub gaming state, the general state, CZ (chance zone), the first ART (simulated bonus), the second ART, in preparation for the ART (the second ART is started after the end of the first ART) Between the end of the first ART and the start of the second ART), the BR (battle rush), and the flag are set.

  When the second ART (ART) is won by ART lottery performed during BB (hereinafter, referred to as “non-ART BB”) in the first ART (simulated bonus), after the first ART is completed, The ART of 2 is started. During ART preparation, it is a game period until the RT gaming state (RT3 gaming state) after the end of the first ART shifts to the RT4 gaming state in order to start the second ART. Specifically, if a display combination relating to a specific internal winning combination (“C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C”) is established during ART preparation, ART preparation in progress is ended, and the second ART Is started.

[General status]
The general state is a sub gaming state executed during the RT0 gaming state, during the RT1 gaming state, and during the RT2 gaming state. During this general state, basically, each game (game) refers to a CZ (chance zone) lottery table (see FIG. 50) described later, and a lottery (CZ lottery) as to whether or not to shift to CZ is performed. It will be. Then, when the transition to the CZ is determined, a lottery is performed to determine the number of precursor games (hereinafter referred to as “the number of CZ precursor games”) until the transition to the CZ.

  In addition, as a pachislot of the present invention, a CZ lottery table may be used in which the number of precursor games before transition to CZ is simultaneously extracted at the same time as the lottery whether to shift to CZ. That is, whether or not to shift to CZ, and the number of CZ precursor games to shift to CZ may be determined by one lottery.

[CZ (chance zone)]
CZ is a sub gaming state executed during the RT0 gaming state and during the RT1 gaming state. When the transition of CZ is determined in the general state, and the game of the number of CZ precursor games is consumed, the sub gaming state is transitioned from the general state to CZ. Then, after transitioning to CZ, a notification that it is desirable to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) (hereinafter referred to as “targeting black BAR”) CZ ends when the predetermined number of times is performed.

  If the symbol combination corresponding to a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") is stopped and displayed during CZ, execution of the first ART is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the first ART is determined by digesting a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) before the “target for black BAR navigation” is performed a specified number of times.

  In the present embodiment, “CZ1” and “CZ2” are provided as CZ. In "CZ1", "4" is set as the specified number of times for performing "Go to BAR with black navigation". That is, “CZ1” is ended when “Go to BAR” is performed four times. On the other hand, in “CZ2”, “10” is set as the prescribed number of times for performing “Go to BAR”. That is, "CZ2" ends when "Aim at the black BAR" is performed ten times. Note that the number of times “Caz 1 and CZ 2” “Navigate for the black BAR” is performed is managed by the CZ cut-in number counter.

  In “CZ1” and “CZ2”, when a specific internal winning combination (“C_BAR_A” to “C_BAR_E”) is determined as the internal winning combination, the probability of executing “Near Black BAR” is the same. The same is true for the probability of executing "Go to BAR" when a specific internal winning combination is not determined as an internal winning combination. Therefore, "CZ2", which has a large number of specified times for performing "Navigation targeting a black BAR", has a higher probability of determining execution of the first ART than "CZ1".

  Note that “CZ2” may have a higher probability of winning a bonus in the bonus lottery than “CZ1”. Moreover, as "CZ2" which concerns on the game machine of this invention, you may make high the probability that a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A"-"C_BAR_E") will be won rather than "CZ1", for example.

[First ART]
The first ART is a sub gaming state executed during the RT3 gaming state, and is a so-called simulated bonus. For example, the first ART (simulated bonus) is determined when the bonus is won by the bonus lottery during the general condition, during CZ, during the first ART, during the second ART. Also, it is determined when the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") is stopped and displayed during CZ.

  Furthermore, the first ART is determined when the number of bonus winning games predetermined by the lottery has been consumed after the end of the first ART. The number of games previously determined by the lottery is set to the bonus winning game number counter. The value of the bonus winning game number counter is decremented by "1" for each game (game) played after the end of the first ART. Then, when the bonus game number counter becomes “0”, the winning of the first ART (simulated bonus) is determined.

  When the second ART is started after the end of the first ART, the bonus winning game number counter is subtracted from the game in the second ART. In addition, if the bonus is won by the bonus lottery before the value of the bonus winning game number counter becomes "0", or if the winning of the bonus is determined during the CZ, the bonus winning game number is newly decided by the lottery. Be done.

  The first ART (simulated bonus) is divided into three types: RB (regular bonus), BB (big bonus), and SBB (super big bonus). In the present embodiment, when the winning of the first ART (simulated bonus) is determined, one of RB, BB, and SBB is determined by lottery.

  RB, BB, and SBB differ in the number of stay games (hereinafter, “the number of first ART start G (games)”). In the present embodiment, the first ART start G number when the type of simulated bonus is RB is determined to be “30”. Further, the first ART start G number in the case of BB is determined to be “60”, and the first ART start G number in the case of SBB is determined to be “100”.

  The “first ART start G number” determined according to the type of pseudo bonus is set in the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter. The value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter is decremented by "1" for each game in the first ART (simulated bonus). The first ART (simulated bonus) ends when the value of the RB game number counter or the BB game number counter becomes “0”.

  The first ART is started after the game of the first ART precursor game number determined by the lottery is consumed and is under preparation. In the first ART precursor game, an effect of notifying whether or not the first ART (simulated bonus) is won is performed. When the first ART is won and the type is BB or SBB, a game is being performed during BB preparation after the end of the first ART precursor game. On the other hand, when the type of the first ART is RB, a game is being performed during RB preparation after the end of the first ART precursor game.

  In the game during BB preparation where the type of the simulated bonus determined is BB, in order to display the combination stop related to the transition to the RT2 gaming state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 gaming state (“normally rep”) The stop order of is notified. Also, when the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is “14” to “17”, the combination of symbols related to “C_BNS (* 1)” described above (combination of symbols recalling BB) is stopped. The stop order for displaying is notified. Then, when the combination of symbols relating to "C_BNS (* 1)" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART in which the type of simulated bonus is BB is started.

  In the game during BB preparation where the type of the simulated bonus determined is SBB, in order to display a combination stop of symbols related to the transition to the RT2 gaming state (“C_CD_REP”) or the maintenance of the RT2 gaming state (“normally rep”) The stop order of is notified. Also, when the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is “18”, the stop order for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols related to “C_SBB” described above (combination of symbols recalling SBB) is notified Be done. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_SBB" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART in which the type of simulated bonus is SBB is started.

  In the RB preparation game, a stop order for displaying combination stop display of symbols relating to the transition to the RT2 gaming state ("C_CD_REP") or the maintenance of the RT2 gaming state ("normal rep") is informed. Also, when the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is “14” to “17”, the symbol combination (combination of symbols recalling RB) related to “C_BNS ※ 2” described above is stopped and displayed. The stop order for the is notified. Then, when the combination of symbols relating to “C_BNS * 2” is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and the first ART in which the type of simulated bonus is RB is started.

  In the first ART, when the winning number associated with the internal winning is a predetermined winning number, the stop order is notified. For example, in the case of the non-MB gaming state, when the winning number for the internal winning is "25" during the first ART, that is, when the turning stop number "25" (see FIG. 48) is selected. In order to pay out a relatively large number of medals, the stop order ("middle left / right" or "middle right left") in which symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_9_BEL" are displayed is informed. When the player performs a stop operation in accordance with the notified stop order, a symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_9_BEL" is displayed, and nine medals are paid out. In the non-MB gaming state, when the sub gaming state is in the general state and the winning number for internal winning is "25", the stop order in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_9_BEL" is displayed Will not be reported. Therefore, when the player performs the stop operation with the recommended forward press ("left middle right" or "right and left middle") in the general state, the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_3_BEL" is displayed, and three symbols are displayed. The medal is paid out. Therefore, the player who performs the stop operation according to the stop order notified in the first ART can obtain more medals than in the general state.

[Second ART]
The second ART is a sub gaming state executed during the RT4 gaming state. For example, in the BB in the first ART (simulated bonus) which is started by winning other than in the second ART (hereinafter referred to as "BB in non-ART"), the second ART is selected by ART lottery. It is decided when ART wins. When the winning of the second ART is determined, “50” is determined as the number of staying games of the second ART (hereinafter, “the number of second ART start G (game)”). “50,” which is the “second ART start G number”, is set to the ART game number counter. The value of the ART game number counter is decremented by "1" every game in the second ART.

  The second ART is started after the game of the second ART precursor game number determined by the lottery is consumed and the ART preparing game is passed. In the second ART precursor game, an effect of notifying whether or not the second ART has been won is performed. Then, if the second ART is won, the ART preparing game is played after the second ART precursor game is over.

  In the ART preparing game, the stop order for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols relating to the aforementioned "C_small V" is informed. Then, when the combination of symbols related to "C_small V" is stopped and displayed, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT4 gaming state, and the second ART is started.

  In the second ART, as in the first ART, when the winning number relating to the internal winning is a predetermined winning number, the stop order is informed. For example, in the non-MB gaming state, when the winning number for the internal winning is "25" during the second ART, that is, when the turning stop number "25" (see FIG. 48) is selected. In order to pay out a relatively large number of medals, the stop order ("middle left / right" or "middle right left") in which symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_9_BEL" are displayed is informed. When the player performs a stop operation in accordance with the notified stop order, a symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_9_BEL" is displayed, and nine medals are paid out. In the non-MB gaming state, when the sub gaming state is in the general state and the winning number for internal winning is "25", the stop order in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "C_9_BEL" is displayed Will not be reported. Therefore, the player who performs the stop operation according to the stop order notified in the second ART can obtain more medals than in the general state.

  Also, during the second ART, when the winning number for internal winning is the internal winning combination relating to the transition and maintenance of the RT state, for example, “C_CU_REP”, “C_CD_REP”, “ordinary rep”, etc. The player may be notified of the pushing order in order to shift from the RT4 state to another RT state or to maintain the RT4 gaming state. For example, in the non-MB gaming state, in the second ART, when the winning number for internal winning is "12", that is, when the turning stop number "12" (see FIG. 48) is selected, When the state RT4 is to be maintained, the stop order (that is, "right and left middle" or "right, middle and left") in which the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination "normal lip" is displayed is informed. When the player performs the stop operation in accordance with the notified stop order, the combination of symbols relating to the "normal rep" is stopped and displayed, and the RT4 gaming state is maintained.

  In the second ART, when the winning number related to the internal winning is not a predetermined winning number, the stop order is not notified. For example, in the case of the non-MB gaming state, when the winning numbers relating to the internal winnings are "34" to "42" during the second ART, the stop order is not notified.

  Also, in the second ART, the number of added games is randomly selected (number of added games) with reference to the number-of-games addition lottery table (not shown) for each game (game), and the determined number of added games is the number of ART games Add to the counter. That is, as the number of added games is determined in the second ART, the number of ART games is increased, and the advantageous second ART can be continued for a long time.

  When the value of the ART game number counter becomes "0", ART withdrawal processing is performed. In the ART withdrawal process, so-called withdrawal is performed in which "50" is set again in the ART game number counter with a predetermined probability. The predetermined probability can be arbitrarily set, but is set to 1% or less in the present embodiment.

  In a game that is performed until the predetermined winning number notified of the stop order is won after the pullback is performed in the ART withdrawal process, the stop operation is performed by pressing in order (“left middle right” and “right and left middle”) As long as it is performed, the subtraction of the value of the ART game number counter is not performed. The value of the ART game number counter is decremented by "1" for each game from the next game of the game won by the predetermined winning number (see FIG. 29 and FIG. 48) notified of the stop order after the withdrawal. Ru. Even in the case of a game in which the value of the ART game number counter is not decremented, lottery of the number of added games is performed.

  In addition, after the withdrawal in the ART withdrawal process, in the game which is performed until the predetermined winning number notified of the stop order is won, if the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward press, The value of the ART game number counter is decremented by "1" for each game from the next game of the game in which the stop operation has been performed in the stop order other than the forward press. The details of the ART withdrawal processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[BR (Battle Rush)]
The BR (battle rush) is a sub game state associated with an effect for which addition (addition) of the ART game number is expected, and is executed during the second ART. The lottery to decide whether or not to execute this BR is every game in BB (hereinafter referred to as “BB in ART”) in the first ART (simulated bonus) started winning in the second ART. To be done. In addition, while the BR is being executed, the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted.

  In BR, BR continuous lottery is performed for each predetermined number of games ("10" in the present embodiment), and when BR continuation is determined, the number of added G (games) lottery for lottery the number of additions (addition) of ART game number. Do. The additional game number determined by the additional G number lottery is notified in the final (10th game) game of the predetermined number of games. Also, the determined number of added games is added to the ART game number counter.

  If the number of times BR continuation is determined (the number of BR continuations) satisfies a specific number (n times “5” in this embodiment (n = 1, 2, 3,...)) Perform additional lottery G (game) number lottery different from lottery.

  As the additional additional G number lottery in the present embodiment, five types of “additional additional A”, “additional additional B”, “additional additional C1”, “additional additional C2”, and “additional additional C3” are provided. In the case of performing additional additional G number lottery, the type of additional additional G number lottery is determined by additional additional lottery in BR, and the number of additional games is determined by the determined additional additional G number lottery.

  The determination of the number of added games and the notification of the number of added games by the additional added G number lottery are performed by the special number of games (“2” in this embodiment) to be performed after the predetermined number of games are finished. Further, the additional game number determined by the additional additional G number lottery is added to the additional game number counter. In addition, when the game of the special game number ends, the game of the predetermined game number is started, and if the BR continuation is determined, the determined additional game number is informed in the last game of the predetermined game number. Ru.

  As described above, in BR, when the number of addition (addition) of the number of ART games is determined, there is an opportunity for the addition of the number of next ART games to be performed after a predetermined number of games. Thereby, the interest concerning the determination of the addition of the number of ART games continues, and the interest of the game can be improved for a long time.

  In addition, in a game of a predetermined number of games in BR, it is possible to perform an effect expecting continuous addition of the number of ART games. As a result, the player's expectation of obtaining advantageous benefits (addition of the number of ART games) is maintained, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, since the continuous lottery is performed for each predetermined number of games, it is possible to suggest the result of the continuous lottery in the predetermined number of games. That is, it is possible to suggest the result of the continuous lottery by using the continuous effects performed over a plurality of games. This makes it possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced even if the game continues without determination of the addition (addition) of the number of ART games.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of times the continuation is determined becomes equal to or more than the specified number (“20” in the present embodiment), the winning of the first ART (simulated bonus) and BR (battle) are provided as benefits. The start of the rush is decided. As a result, a sense of expectation other than the addition of the number of additional games can be included in the result of the continuous lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the number of times the continuation is determined satisfies the specific number (in the present embodiment, n times “5” (n = 1, 2, 3...)), The additional G number is randomly selected. And do another additional addition G number lottery. As a result, as the continuation continues, the value of the number of added games may be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Between flags]
It is a sub gaming state in which transition is made when a pseudo bonus (first ART) is won, a BB precursor flag described later is on, and a first ART precursor game is 0.

<Structure of data table stored in ROM cartridge substrate>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the ROHM cartridge substrate 76 will be described.

[CZ (chance zone) lottery table]
First, the CZ (chance zone) lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The CZ lottery table is referred to when the sub gaming state is a general state. The CZ lottery table indicates the correspondence between the winning content of the CZ (chance zone) and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In CZ lottery using the CZ lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the lottery value. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  As shown in FIG. 50, when performing CZ lottery with reference to the CZ lottery table, there is a high probability that the lottery result will be "no winning". For example, when the winning number is “27” (abbreviated “F_strong bell”), the probability is “no winning” with a probability of 32718/32768 and “CZ2 winning” with a probability of 50/32768.

[CZ during cut-in addition lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the CZ middle cut-in additional lottery table will be described. The CZ middle cut-in additional lottery table is referred to when the sub gaming state is middle CZ. The CZ middle cut-in additional lottery table indicates the correspondence between the presence or absence of the specified number of additions and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In the cut-in addition lottery using the CZ middle cut-in additional lottery table, first, random values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are extracted as lottery results Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified in accordance with. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, if the winning number is "27" (abbreviated "F_strong bell"), "1 additional to the specified number" is always determined, and the winning number is "34" (abbreviated "F_ watermelon") In the case, “1 addition to the specified number of times” is determined with the probability of 16384/32768. When “1 addition to the specified number” is determined, “1” is added to the value of the CZ cut-in number counter. As a result, the number of times to perform "Go to BAR" navigation in CZ is increased by one.

[CZ during cut-in occurrence lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the CZ cut-in occurrence / lottery table will be described. The CZ during cut-in occurrence lottery table is referred to when the sub gaming state is during CZ. This CZ middle cut-in occurrence / lottery table indicates a lottery value set in accordance with the presence / absence of a lost cut-in when the result of the internal lottery is “loss”.

  In the cut-in generation lottery using the CZ middle cut-in generation lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are extracted as lottery results Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified in accordance with. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is “loss”, “loss-cut-in occurrence” is determined with a probability of 10000/32768. The lost-cut-in is a "Near to black bar navigation" performed when a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") is not won. In "Naviar for the black BAR", it informs that it is good to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") and the stop order in that case (right middle left) Do. When the lost cut-in is executed, the combination of symbols corresponding to a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") is not displayed stopped.
Even when a specific internal winning combination ("C_BAR_A" to "C_BAR_E") is won, "Navis for aiming at black BAR" is performed.

[Bonus lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the bonus lottery table will be described. The bonus lottery table is referred to when the sub gaming state is in the general state or in the second ART. The bonus lottery table indicates the correspondence between the presence or absence of a bonus winning and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In the bonus lottery using the bonus lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the lottery value. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, if the winning number is "27" (abbreviated "F_strong bell"), "bonus winning" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and the winning number is "34" (abbreviated "F_ watermelon") If it is, then "bonus winning" is determined with a probability of 326/32768. When the "bonus win" is determined, a first ART (simulated bonus) is started after a first ART precursor game and a preparation game corresponding to various bonuses.

  The bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 53 indicates a bonus lottery table for low probability that the probability that "bonus winning" is determined is a predetermined probability. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, a bonus lottery table for high probability is provided in which the probability that "bonus winning" is determined is higher than the bonus lottery table for low probability. In the present embodiment, a bonus lottery table to be used is determined according to types of a plurality of modes described later.

[BB number of G added lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the BB in-G number addition lottery table will be described. The BB in-G number addition lottery table is referred to when being in the BB in the first ART. This BB in-G number addition lottery table indicates the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set in accordance with the winning number.

  In the BB G number superimposing using the BB G number superposing lottery table, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are It sequentially subtracts by the lottery value specified according to the lottery result. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, if the winning number is "27" (abbreviated "F_strong bell"), "20 G" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and the winning number is "34" (abbreviated "F_ watermelon") In some cases, "10 G" is determined with a probability of 2000/32768. When the number of G (games) such as “10 G” and “20 G” is determined, the determined number of G is added to the BB middle high probability counter.

[ART lottery table during BB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the during-BB ART lottery table will be described. The ART lottery table during BB shown in FIG. 55 is referred to when the BB during non-ART is in the high probability state described later. This BB mid-art ART lottery table is the second of the cases where the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to winning numbers “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”). Indicates the lottery value set according to the presence or absence of winning of ART.

  In ART lottery using ART lottery table during BB, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the selected lottery value. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in non-ART BB and in a high probability state, when the result of internal lottery is a special internal winning combination, "ART winning" is determined. This "ART winning" means that the winning of the second ART has been determined. When the "ART winning" is determined, the second ART is started after the second ART precursor game and the ART preparing game.

[BB medium BR lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the BB medium BR random determination table will be described. The BB-in-BR BR lottery table is referred to in the case of being in BB during ART and in a high probability state. The BB middle BR lottery table is a winning of the BR when the result of the internal lottery is a special internal winning combination (the internal winning combinations corresponding to winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11"). Indicates the lottery value set according to the presence or absence of

  In the BR lottery using the BB middle BR lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the selected lottery value. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  As shown in FIG. 56, in BB in ART and in a high probability state, when the result of internal lottery is a special internal winning combination, “Battle Rush (BR) 1 with probability 16384/32768” A win is determined, and a battle rush (BR) 2 win is determined with a probability of 3276/32768. "BR2" has a higher probability of winning "BR continuation" in continuous lottery than "BR1". The determined "BR1" or "BR2" is started after the end of the first ART (simulated bonus).

[BR continuous lottery table]
Next, referring to FIGS. 57 and 58, the BR continuous lottery table will be described. The BR1 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 57 is referred to when it is in BR1. The BR2 continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 58 is referred to when BR2 is in progress. The BR1 continuous lottery table and the BR2 continuous lottery table indicate lottery values set in accordance with the presence or absence of BR continuation.

  In the BR lottery using the BR1 continuous lottery table or the BR2 continuous lottery table, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are extracted as lottery results. Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified in accordance with. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  As shown in FIG. 57, in the BR continuation lottery using the BR1 continuous lottery table, “BR continuation” is determined with a probability of 26214/32768. Also, as shown in FIG. 58, in the BR continuation lottery using the BR2 continuous lottery table, “BR continuation” is determined with a probability of 29490/32768.

[Additional extra lottery table in BR]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the BR additional additional lottery table will be described. The BR during addition additional lottery table is referred to when BR is underway. The during-BR additional-addition lottery table indicates the correspondence between the content of the addition and the lottery value set in accordance with the number of continuations of BR.

  In addition addition lottery using an addition addition lottery table during BR, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) according to the lottery result Subtract sequentially with the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, if the number of BR continuations is "5" (BR5 series), "additional addition A" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768, and "additional addition B" is determined with a probability of 9434/32768. . Further, the "additional addition C1" is determined with a probability of 4000/32768, the "additional addition C2" is determined with a probability of 2500/32768, and the "additional addition C3" is determined with a probability of 450/32768.

[BR during additional addition and promotion lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the BR additional addition and promotion lottery table will be described. The BR during additional addition and promotion lottery table is referred to when it is during BR. The BR additional addition and promotion lottery table indicates the correspondence between the contents of the addition and the lottery value set according to the winning number.

  In addition addition and promotion lottery using BR addition addition and promotion lottery tables, first, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768), It sequentially subtracts by the lottery value specified according to the lottery result. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, if the winning number is “27” (abbreviated “F_strong bell”), “additional addition C1” is determined with a probability of 25768/32768, and “additional additional C2” is determined with a probability of 6000/32768. Be done. Also, "additional addition C3" is determined with a probability of 1000/32768. In addition, if it is decided to carry out the additional additional lottery, the additional additional and enhanced lottery table in BR is used to perform a lottery as to whether or not to be further promoted to the additional additional lottery.

  It should be noted that the higher additional additional lottery has a higher degree of probability (probability) that the value of the number of additional games to be determined is larger than that of the lower additional additional lottery. In the present embodiment, “additional addition B” is higher than “additional addition A”, and “additional addition C1”, “additional addition C2”, and “additional addition C3” are higher than “additional addition B”. Also, “additional addition C2” is higher than “additional addition C1”, and “additional addition C3” is higher than “additional addition C2”.

[Additional added A added G number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the additional added A added G number lottery table will be described. The additional added A added G number lottery table is referred to in the case of performing added G number random determination relating to “additional added A” in BR. The additional added A added G number lottery table indicates the added G number and the lottery value set according to the added G number.

  In addition G addition number A addition G number lottery table In addition G number lottery, first, the random number value which is extracted from the range of the numerical value which is decided beforehand (this execution form 0-32767, random number denominator = 32768) Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified according to the result. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, in the additional G number lottery using the additional additional A additional G number lottery table, "10" is determined as the "additional game number" with a probability of 12568/32768, and as a "superimposed game number" with a probability of 13000/32768. "20" is determined. Further, "100" is determined as the "number of added games" with a probability of 500/32768, and "200" is determined as the "number of added games" with a probability of 100/32768. Then, the value of “the number of added games” determined is added to the ART game number counter.

[Additional addition B addition G number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the additional added B added G number random determination table will be described. The additional added B additional G number lottery table is referred to in the case where the additional G number random determination relating to the “additional additional B” is performed in BR. The additional added B added G number lottery table indicates the correspondence between the added G number and the lottery value set in accordance with the stop operation.

  Addition G addition B addition G addition G number lottery using the G number lottery table is performed each time the stop operation is detected. The column “1 on” shown in FIG. 62 is referred to when the first stop operation (the first stop operation) is performed. In addition, the column "2on_pre + 10" is referred to when the second stop operation (second stop operation) is performed after "10" is determined as the number of games to be added in the first stop operation. Ru. Then, the column “3 on_pre + 10” is referred to when the third stop operation (third stop operation) is performed after “10” is determined as the number of added games in the second stop operation. Ru.

  In the addition G addition number B addition G addition number table in addition addition B number first, random number value which is extracted from the range of this numerical value which is decided beforehand (in this execution form 0-32767, random number denominator = 32768) Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified according to the result. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, in the case of "1 on", "20" is determined as the "number of added games" with a probability of 13000/32768. When the second stop operation is performed after "20" is determined as the "number of added games" in the first stop operation, the field of "2on_pre + 20" is referred to in the additional G number lottery.

  For example, in the case of "2on_pre + 20", "30" is determined as the "number of added games" with a probability of 6000/32768. When the third stop operation is performed after "30" is determined as the "number of added games" in the second stop operation, the column of "3 on_pre + 30" is referred to in the additional G number lottery.

  For example, in the case of “3 on —previous +30”, “50” is determined as the “number of added games” with a probability of 500/32768. In this case, by performing the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, a total of "100" is acquired as the "number of added games", and "100" is displayed in the ART game number counter. It is added.

  Referring to the “2on_pre + 20” column of FIG. 62, “0” and “10” are not determined as the number of additional games. Also, referring to the “2on_pre + 30” column in FIG. 62, “0”, “10” and “20” are not determined as the number of additional games. Then, referring to the “3 on_pre + 50” column, “0”, “10”, “20” and “30” are not determined as the number of additional games.

  Thus, in the additional G number lottery using the additional additional B additional G number lottery table, the number of additional games determined in the second stop operation becomes equal to or greater than the number of additional games determined in the first stop operation, and the third The number of added games determined by the stop operation is equal to or greater than the number of added games determined by the second stop operation.

[Additional addition C addition G number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the additional added C added G number random determination table will be described. The additional additional C additional G number lottery table is referred to in the case of performing additional G number random determination relating to “additional additional C1”, “additional additional C2” or “additional additional C3” in BR. The additional added C added G number lottery table indicates the correspondence between the added G number and the lottery value set according to the type (C1 to C3) of the added added C.

  Addition G addition G addition number G addition lottery using the G addition lottery table is performed each time pressing of the MAX bet button 14 is detected, and ends with the determination of "0" as the "number of added games" (" It will not be continued.

  In the addition G addition number addition table using the addition addition C addition G number selection table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are extracted Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified according to the result. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, in the case of “additional addition C1”, “0” is determined as the “number of additional games” with a probability of 8918/32768. Also, in the case of “additional addition C2”, “0” is determined as the “number of additional games” with a probability of 4918/32768. Then, in the case of "additional addition C3", "0" is determined as the "number of additional games" with a probability of 2918/32768.

  Therefore, the "additional addition C2" has a higher probability that the additional G number lottery continues than "the additional addition C1", and the "additional additional C3" has the probability that the additional G number lottery continues than the "additional additional C2". high.

  In addition, when the added G number lottery using the additional added C added G number lottery table is started, when the start lever 16 is operated and the next game is started, the added additional C added G is automatically added. Perform the additional G number lottery using the number lottery table. Then, if “0” is determined as “the number of added games” in the automatically added G number lottery, the automatically added G number lottery is ended. Note that the automatic addition G number random determination may have an upper limit (for example, "1000") of the value of the "additional game number" to be determined.

  Further, in the additional G number lottery using the additional additional C additional G number lottery table, except for “0” is determined as “the number of additional games”, the start lever 16 is operated in a state where “continuation” is determined. There is a case. In this case, the "number of added games" determined up to that point is made effective, and addition G is randomly added using the addition C added G number lottery table automatically. Then, the number of added games determined in the automatically added G number lottery is added to the number of added games automatically determined before performing the added G number lottery, and the added amount is added. C Added G Number G Added number is the number of added games acquired by the G number lottery using the G number lottery table.

[Causal value lottery table]
Next, the causal value lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. The causal value lottery table is referred to when performing a causal value lottery by satisfying various conditions. The causal value lottery table indicates the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set in accordance with various conditions.

  In the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the value of “causal value” is obtained in various situations where the interest of the game is reduced (the player feels uncomfortable). Then, an advantageous benefit is given to the player based on the accumulated "causal value". Therefore, even if a scene where the interest of the game is reduced, it may be possible to obtain advantageous benefits thereafter. This makes it possible to prevent the player from stopping the game as the interest of the game decreases.

  In the causal value lottery using the causal value lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the selected lottery value. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 64 shows a causal value lottery table (part 1). The causal value lottery table (part 1) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery values set according to the number of G (games) among the rares.

  The role of rare according to the present embodiment is “strong bell” (toll number “27”), “watermelon” (toll number “34”), “weak cherry” (toll number “35”), “strong cherry” (toll The numbers are "36") and "the chance eyes" (the winning numbers "38" to "40"). And "the number of G between the roles of rare" is the number of G from when one of the roles of rare is determined as the internal winning combination to the next of any of the roles of the rare is determined as the internal winning combination.

For example, when "the number of G between the roles of rare players" reaches "50 G (game)", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 3000 / 32,768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.
In addition, when "the number of G between rare roles" exceeds "200 G", the causal value lottery is performed with reference to the "200 G" column every time the "number of G between rare roles" increases by 100 G thereafter.

  FIG. 65 shows a causal value lottery table (part 2). The causal value lottery table (No. 2) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set in accordance with the number of G (games) among the bonus. The bonus interval is the number of G from the end of the first ART (simulated bonus) to the start of the next first ART (simulated bonus).

  For example, when "the number of G between bonus" reaches "200 G (game)", "1" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 3000 / 32,768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

  FIG. 66 shows a causal value lottery table (part 3). The causal value lottery table (3) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G (games) between BBs. Between BBs is the number of G from the end of the BB in the first ART (simulated bonus) to the start of the BB in the next first ART (simulated bonus).

  For example, when "the number of G between BBs" reaches "400 G (game)", "3" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

  FIG. 67 shows a causal value lottery table (part 4). The causal value lottery table (4) indicates the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of G (games) between ARTs. Between ARTs is the number of G from the end of the second ART to the start of the next second ART.

  For example, when "the number of G between ARTs" reaches "500 G (game)", "3" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 2000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

  FIG. 68 shows a causal value lottery table (part 5). The causal value lottery table (No. 5) indicates the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of consecutive RBs. The consecutive number of RBs is the number of times that RBs are continuously extracted as the type of pseudo bonus when the first ART (simulated bonus) is determined. The number of consecutive RBs is counted by the RB consecutive counter.

  For example, when the “number of consecutive RBs” is “4”, “5” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 1000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. Also, the value of the RB continuation counter is cleared when BB or SBB is determined in the first ART (simulated bonus).

  FIG. 69 shows a causal value lottery table (part 6). The causal value lottery table (part 6) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of consecutive CZ (chance zone) failures. The consecutive number of CZ failures is the number of consecutive times that "CZ1" and "CZ2" end without the first ART (pseudo bonus) being determined. In the present embodiment, a column is also provided in the case where the CZ failure is the first time. Also, the number of consecutive CZ failures is counted by the CZ failure continuous counter.

  For example, when “the number of consecutive CZ failures” is “failure_2 consecutive”, “1” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 3000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. Also, the value of the CZ failure continuous counter is cleared when the first ART (simulated bonus) is determined in “CZ1” and “CZ2”. Note that the value of the CZ failure continuous counter may be cleared when the first ART (simulated bonus) is started.

  FIG. 70 shows a causal value lottery table (part 7). The causal value lottery table (7) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set in accordance with the number of consecutive Gs of CZ ended without determining the bonus.

  For example, when "the number of continuation Gs of CZ ended without bonus confirmation" is "4 G", "10" is determined as the "causal value" with a probability of 20000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

  “CZ1” and “CZ2” are periods in which the interest of the player is increased because the determination of the first ART (simulated bonus) can be expected more than in the normal game. However, “CZ1” and “CZ2” according to the present embodiment have the possibility of ending in a short period (a small number of games) since the ending condition is the number of executions of “Aim at the black BAR”. Therefore, when “CZ1” and “CZ2” end in a short period of time, the “causal value” is assigned or the probability of assigning the “causal value” is increased. As a result, even if there is a scene where the interest of the game in "CZ1" and "CZ2" is reduced, there is a possibility that advantageous benefits can be obtained thereafter, and the player is prevented from stopping the game. it can.

  FIG. 71 shows a causal value lottery table (part 8). The causal value lottery table (part 8) is referred to when the setting of the pachislot 1 is changed. The causal value lottery table (part 8) indicates the causal value and the lottery value set according to the causal value.

  For example, when the setting of pachislot 1 is changed, “10” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 2000/32768, and “40” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 8000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter.

  FIG. 72 shows a causal value lottery table (part 9). The causal value lottery table (No. 9) shows the correspondence between the causal value and the lottery value set according to the number of Gs digested during preparation of various pseudo bonus and ART (second ART). Also, the number of G digested during preparation is counted by the in-progress digestion G number counter.

  For example, when the “number of games digested during preparation” reaches “20 G”, “1” is determined as the “causal value” with a probability of 20000/32768. The determined causal value is added to the causal value counter. In addition, the value of the in-provision digested G number counter is cleared on the condition of the start of various artificial bonus or the second ART.

[Provisional causal value lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the provisional causal value lottery table will be described. The provisional causal value lottery table is referred to when the development presentation fails. The temporary causal value lottery table indicates the correspondence between the temporary causal value and the lottery value set according to the type of the development effect.

  The "development effect" according to the present embodiment is continuously executed over a plurality of games, and whether or not the first ART (simulated bonus) is won, or whether or not the CZ (chance zone) is won. It is an effect of informing And "when the development effect fails" is a case where it is informed that the first ART (simulated bonus) is not won in the development effect, or that it is not won in the CZ (chance zone).

  The “notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player is determined” may be notification of various winnings such as winning of the second ART (ART). Also, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with a bonus (so-called "BB" or "MB" or the like to be carried over), the bonus is won as "a notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player has been determined". The notification of what was done can be mentioned.

  In addition, the time when the “playing state advantageous to the player” is started may be from the next game for which the notification was made, and a special condition was satisfied in the game after the notification was made. It may be the case. As special conditions, for example, that a special internal winning combination (an internal winning combination for a bonus) has been determined, or that a special combination of symbols (a combination of starting bonus symbols) has been stopped and displayed It can be mentioned.

  Furthermore, the "notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player is determined" related to the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the definite notification of the various winnings as described above, and has been described above It may be a notification that suggests such various winnings. In addition, "the notification that the start of the gaming state advantageous to the player is not determined" related to the gaming machine according to the present invention definitely notifies that the various winnings as described above are not determined. The notification may be a notification that indicates that various winnings have not been determined.

  In the temporary causal value lottery using the temporary causal value lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are used according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, when “development effect 1” fails, “3” is determined as the “temporary causal value” with a probability of 2000/32768. On the other hand, if “development effect 4” fails, “3” is determined as the “temporary causal value” with a probability of 3000/32768. The “causal value” is determined based on the “temporary causal value” and the “internal point” described later.

  In "development effect 4", there is a high probability that notification of the start of the game state advantageous to the player is determined than in "development effect 1". Therefore, in the case of "promotional effect 4", when the notification that the start of the gaming state which is advantageous for the player is not determined is performed, the dissatisfaction of the player is increased, but the advantageous benefit is given later. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that

[Inside point lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the internal point lottery table will be described. The internal point lottery table is referred to when performing internal point lottery. And internal point lottery is performed in every game. The internal point lottery table indicates the correspondence between internal points and lottery values set in accordance with the winning number.

  In internal point lottery using the internal point lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are defined according to the lottery result. Subtract sequentially with the selected lottery value. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, if the winning number is “27” (abbreviated “F_strong bell”), “1” is determined as an “internal point” with a probability of 512/32768, and “internal point” with a probability of 265/32768 As "3" is determined. The determined "internal point" is added to the internal point counter.

  The value of the internal point counter is the highest value of the “causal value” determined when the development effect fails. For example, it is assumed that "5" is determined as the "provisional causal value" by the provisional causal value lottery performed when the development effect fails, and the value of the internal point counter at that time is "10". In this case, since "10" is guaranteed as the highest value of "causal value", "5" of "temporary causal value" is determined as "causal value".

On the other hand, it is assumed that “5” is determined as “provisional cause value” by the temporary cause value lottery, and the value of the internal point counter at that time is “3”. In this case, since "3" is guaranteed as the highest value of "causal value", "5" of "temporary causal value" is not determined as "causal value" as it is, but the internal points acquired so far The same value "3" is determined as the "causal value".
When the development effect fails and the “causal value” is determined, the value determined as the “causal value” is subtracted from the value of the internal point counter.

[Causal value stock consumption lottery table]
Next, a causal value stock consumption lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The causal value stock consumption lottery table is referred to when giving the player advantageous benefits based on the value of the causal value stock. This causal value stock consumption lottery table indicates the presence or absence of consumption of causal value stock and the lottery value set according to the presence or absence of consumption of the causal value stock.

  The "causal value stock" is given when the "causal value" becomes "100" or more. Specifically, when the value of the causal value counter becomes "100" or more, "1" is added to the causal value stock counter, and "100" is subtracted from the value of the causal value counter.

  In the causal value stock consumption lottery using the causal value stock consumption lottery table, first, random number values extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768) are extracted as lottery results Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified in accordance with. Next, it is determined whether the result of subtraction has become negative (whether so-called “worried” has occurred). And, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("a digit" occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, in the case of giving an advantage advantageous to the player based on the value of the causal value stock, "non consumption" of the "causal value stock" is determined with a probability of 16384/32768. In this case, advantageous benefits are provided to the player without reducing the value of the causal value stock counter.

  As a benefit advantageous to the player given based on the value of the causal value stock, there is a change of the type of simulated bonus to a higher simulated bonus. For example, when “BB” is determined as a pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus is changed to “SBB”. Also, when the transition to CZ1 is determined, the transition to CZ2 may be made.

  A benefit that is advantageous to the player is not immediately awarded when the “causal value stock” becomes 1 or more, but when a specific condition (decision of a bonus bonus) is satisfied, or It is preferable to give it when it comes to lottery the simulated bonus. In this case, it is possible to urge the player to play the game until the specific condition is satisfied or the specific time is reached after the "causal value stock" becomes 1 or more.

[Operating condition table]
Next, the operating condition table will be described with reference to FIG. The operating condition table is referred to during each preparation. The operation condition table indicates the type under preparation and the operation (end) condition set according to the type under preparation.

  For example, if the winning number "18" (abbreviated "F_W7_KP_RT4") is won during SBB preparation, SBB preparation is finished and SBB in the first ART (simulated bonus) is started. In addition, if winning numbers “14” to “17” (abbreviated “F_R7_KP_RB_0”, “F_R7_KP_RB_1”, “F_RB_KP_R7_0”, “F_RB_KP_R7_1”) are won during BB preparation, BB preparation in progress is ended, and the first ART (pseudo) BB) is started.

  If winning numbers “14” to “17” (abbreviated “F_R7_KP_RB_0”, “F_R7_KP_RB_1”, “F_RB_KP_R7_0”, “F_RB_KP_R7_1”) are won during RB preparation, RB preparation in progress ends and the first ART (pseudo bonus) RB in is started. In addition, during ART preparation, winning numbers “18” to “24” (abbreviated “F_W7_KP_RT4”, “F_KP_R4_R2_1”, “F_KP_R4_R2_2”, “F_KP_R2_R4_1”, “F_KP_R2_R4_2”, “F_R1_R4_2”, “F_R1_R4_2”) The preparation is finished and the second ART is started.

  In the present embodiment, when a combination (a winning number) serving as an end condition in preparation is won, information (stop order navigation) for causing a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination (a winning number) to be stopped is displayed. However, if the stop operation is performed without following the stop order navigation and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the combination serving as the end condition in preparation is not displayed in a stopped state, the preparation in progress is ended.

  Therefore, when the stop operation not following the stop order navigation is performed, the RT gaming state does not shift to the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state, and the first ART (simulated bonus) or the second ART as a sub gaming state is performed. Is started. As a result, the number of games for managing the first ART (simulated bonus) and the second ART in the sub gaming state is subtracted without shifting to the RT3 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state.

<Configuration of Storage Area Provided in Sub RAM>
[Sub storage area]
Next, the configuration of the sub storage area provided in sub RAM 103 will be described with reference to FIG. Although not described here (not shown), the storage area for registering effect contents and effect numbers, and various data such as internal winning combinations transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) are stored. Storage area and the like.

  The sub storage area includes "CZ1 flag", "CZ2 flag", "SBB flag", "BB flag", "RB flag", "ART flag", "BR1 flag", "RB2 flag" and "inter-flag flag" have.

  The "CZ1 flag" is a flag indicating that the CZ1 is in progress, and when it is in the CZ1, "1" is stored in the "CZ1 flag". The "CZ2 flag" is a flag indicating that the CZ2 is inside. When the CZ2 is inside, "1" is stored in the "CZ2 flag".

The "SBB flag" is a flag indicating the middle of the SBB in the first ART (simulated bonus), and when the SBB is in progress, "1" is stored in the "SBB flag". The “BB flag” is a flag indicating that the BB in the first ART is in progress. When the BB is in progress, “1” is stored in the “BB flag”. The “RB flag” is a flag indicating that the RB in the first ART is in progress. When the RB is in progress, “1” is stored in the “RB flag”.
That is, when in the first ART, “1” is stored in any of “SBB flag”, “BB flag”, and “RB flag”.

  Further, "ART flag" is a flag indicating that the second ART is being performed, and when being in the second ART, "1" is stored in the "ART flag".

  The "BR1 flag" is a flag indicating that the BR1 is in progress, and when it is in the BR1, "1" is stored in the "BR1 flag". Further, "RB2 flag" is a flag indicating that BR2 is in progress, and when BR2 is in progress, "1" is stored in "BR2 flag". As described above, in BR1 and BR2, one set is repeated as long as "BR continuation" continues to be won by continuous lottery with 10 games as one set.

  Further, "Inter-flag flag" is a flag indicating the middle of the flag, and when it is between flags, "1" is stored in the "inter-flag flag".

  Further, the sub storage area has an "additional addition A flag", an "additional addition B flag", an "additional addition C1 flag", an "additional addition C2 flag" and an "additional addition C3 flag".

  The “additional addition A flag” is a flag indicating that the addition addition A is being performed, and when the addition addition A is being performed, “1” is stored in the “additional addition A flag”. The “additional addition B flag” is a flag indicating that the addition addition B is being performed, and when the addition addition B is being performed, “1” is stored in the “additional addition B flag”.

  The “additional addition C1 flag” is a flag indicating that the addition addition C1 is in progress, and when the addition addition C1 is in progress, “1” is stored in the “additional addition C1 flag”. The “additional additional C2 flag” is a flag indicating that the additional additional C2 is in progress. When the additional additional C2 is in progress, “1” is stored in the “additional additional C2 flag”. The “additional additional C3 flag” is a flag indicating that the additional additional C3 is in progress. When the additional additional C3 is in progress, “1” is stored in the “additional additional C3 flag”. Note that “1” is stored in the “additional additional C3 flag” also from the determination of the additional addition C3 to the start.

  "CZ1 flag", "CZ2 flag 2", "SBB flag", "BB flag", "RB flag", "ART flag", "BR1 flag", "BR2 flag", "additional additional A flag", "additional It starts actually after the execution of the corresponding effect (transition to the corresponding state) is determined for the additional B flag, additional additional C1 flag, additional additional C2 flag, and additional additional C3 flag. Also "1" is stored until

  Furthermore, the sub storage area has “CZ1 precursor flag”, “CZ2 precursor flag”, “BB precursor flag”, “RB precursor flag”, “ART precursor flag”, and “BR precursor flag”.

  The "CZ1 precursor flag" is a flag indicating that the CZ1 precursor is in the middle. When the CZ1 precursor is in the middle, "1" is stored in the "CZ1 precursor flag". The "CZ2 precursor flag" is a flag indicating that the CZ2 precursor is in the middle. When the CZ2 precursor is in the middle, "1" is stored in the "CZ2 precursor flag".

  The “BB precursor flag” is a flag indicating BB (SBB) precursor, and when the BB (SBB) precursor is in progress, “1” is stored in the “BB precursor flag”. The “RB precursor flag” is a flag indicating RB precursor. When the RB precursor is in the middle, “1” is stored in the “RB precursor flag”.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the bonus has been won, it is determined which one of “SBB”, “BB”, and “RB” to use. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when it is determined that the bonus has been won, it is determined whether or not to set “RB” only, and if it is determined not to set “RB”, “BB” at the end of the BB precursor It may be randomly selected which of SB and BB.

  The "ART precursor flag" is a flag indicating ART (second ART) precursor, and when ART precursor is in progress, "1" is stored in the "ART precursor flag". Further, the "BR precursor flag" is a flag indicating that the BR precursor is in the middle. When the BR precursor is in the middle, "1" is stored in the "BR precursor flag".

  Also, the sub storage area has “SBB preparation flag”, “BB preparation flag”, “RB preparation flag”, and “ART preparation flag”.

  The “SBB preparation flag” is a flag indicating that the SBB preparation is in progress. When the SBB preparation is in progress, “1” is stored in the “SBB preparation flag”. The "BB preparation flag" is a flag indicating that BB preparation is in progress, and when BB preparation is in progress, "1" is stored in the "SBB preparation flag".

  The “RB preparation flag” is a flag indicating RB preparation in progress. When RB preparation is in progress, “1” is stored in the “RB preparation flag”. "ART preparation flag" is a flag indicating that ART preparation is in progress, and "1" is stored in "ART preparation flag" when ART preparation is in progress.

In the present embodiment, “under preparation” conceptually indicates a section in which it is determined to start a predetermined state but can not be started without satisfying the start condition. The preparation is similar to the aura, but unlike the aura, it actively encourages the start condition to be met.
For example, when the occurrence of ART is determined, it is necessary to simultaneously generate AT and RT in order to start ART. The AT can be started immediately by the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9), but the RT is managed by the main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8). However, since communication from the sub control circuit 101 to the main control circuit 91 is not possible, generally, by performing "AT to satisfy start condition of RT by the main control circuit 91", indirectly. It encourages the start of RT. That is, generally, the difference between the start timing of the AT by the sub control circuit 101 and the start timing of the RT by the main control circuit 91 is a section called preparation in progress.

Then, if the determination of the termination condition of ART is started according to the start of AT, the period of AT will be included in the period of ART, so in some cases ART does not occur and the period of ART ends. There is a risk. Such a game machine makes the player feel uncomfortable and also makes the design and development difficult because the period of ART assumed at the time of development (when setting the termination condition) differs from the period of the actual ART. It is also a factor.
Therefore, although AT is performed until the condition of RT (the main control circuit 91 side) is satisfied, by not performing the determination of the termination condition of ART, there is provided a section which is not included as a period of ART. And since this section is a section which prepares ART, this section is called under preparation.

  Further, the sub storage area includes “CZ game number counter”, “simulated bonus game number counter”, “ART game number counter”, “BR game number counter”, “additional added game number counter” and “superimposed game number counter” "have.

  Every time a game is played in CZ1 or CZ2, "1" is added to "CZ game number counter", and the value of "CZ game number counter" is cleared when CZ1 or CZ2 ends. The number of games ("30" or "60" or "100") set according to the type of various pseudo bonus is set in the "game counter during simulated bonus" before the pseudo bonus is started. .

  Then, “the game counter under simulated bonus” is decremented by “1” each time a game is played in the first ART (simulated bonus). Note that when there is a value in the “BB middle high probability counter” described later, the subtraction of the “simulated bonus middle game number counter” is stopped.

  In the "ART game number counter", "50" is set before the second ART is started. Then, “ART game number counter” is decremented by “1” each time a game is played in the second ART. In the "BR game number counter", "10" is set before BR1 or BR2 is started. The "BR game number counter" is decremented by "1" each time a game is played in BR1 or BR2.

  In the "additional additional game number counter", "2" is set before the game concerning the additional additional effect is started. Then, the “additional additional game number counter” is decremented by “1” every time the additional additional effect is played.

  The “additional game number counter” is provided for temporary storage until the total number of additional games is determined when additional addition is performed. Therefore, every time the number of additional games is determined in the additional addition, the determined number of additional games is added to the “additional game number counter”.

  In addition, the sub storage area is "CI (cut in) number counter in CZ", "BB high / low probability counter", "precursor game number counter", "prepare digest G number counter", "internal point counter", " It has a causal value counter "and a" causal value stock counter ".

  In "the number of CIs in CZ counter", "4" is set before CZ1 is started, and "10" is set before CZ2 is started. Then, “CI number counter in CZ” is decremented by “1” each time “aim for black BAR” (cut-in effect) is generated.

  In the “BB middle / high probability counter”, when the number G of additional G according to the first ART (simulated bonus) is determined by the number G of G during BB addition lottery, the determined number of additional G is added. When there is a value in “BB high probability counter”, the first ART (simulated bonus) is in a high probability state. In the high probability state in the first ART, the probability that the winning of the second ART is determined is higher than that of the normal first ART.

  In the "precursor game number counter", the number of precursor games in each precursor is set before each precursor is started. Then, the "precursor game number counter" is decremented by "1" each time the player plays a game. "1" is added to "in-preparation digested G number counter" every time a game is played in each preparation, and the value of "in-progress digested G number counter" is cleared when each in-provisioning is finished.

  The "internal point counter" is added with the value of the determined internal point when the internal point is determined by internal point lottery. When the "causal value" is determined based on the total of the internal points and the "temporary causal value", the value determined as the "causal value" is subtracted from the value of the "internal point counter".

  When the “causal value counter” is determined by the causal value lottery, the “causal value” determined is added. If the value of the “causal value counter” exceeds “100”, “100” is subtracted from the value of the “causal value counter”, and “1” is added to the “causal value stock counter”.

  Further, the sub storage area has “BR continuation flag”, “BR next-next successive storage area”, and “BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32”.

  The "BR continuation flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the next set of BR1 or BR2 is to be started, and if it is decided that the next set of BR1 or BR2 is to be started, "BR continuation flag" "1" is stored.

  The “BR next-next continuous storage area” is a storage area indicating whether or not BR 1 or BR 2 continues to the next set. When it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the next set, “1” is stored in “BR next-next continuous storage area”.

  In this embodiment, special BR continuous lottery is performed separately from BR continuous lottery. If the special BR continuation is won in the special BR continuation lottery, it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the next set. Also, when it is determined that BR1 or BR2 continues to the next set, a special effect of notifying whether it is "continuation" of special BR or not is performed.

  "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32" are flags indicating whether execution of BR1 or BR2 is determined. When execution of BR1 is determined, "1" is stored in any of "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32". When execution of BR2 is determined, "2" is stored in any of "BR stock storage area 1" to "BR stock storage area 32".

  The sub storage area also has a "navi return wait state flag" and a "simulated bonus penalty flag".

  The “navi return wait state flag” is a flag set to ON when so-called pullback is performed in the ART pullback lottery process (see FIG. 107) described later (S614 in FIG. 107). When the “navi return wait state flag” is on, the ART game number counter is not decremented in the during ART process (see FIG. 105) described later. Moreover, in the game after the pullback is performed, the “navi return wait state flag” indicates that the first stop operation (the first stop operation) is performed on other than the left reel 3L, or When the predetermined winning number relating to the notification of the stop order in 2ART is determined by the main CPU 93, it is set to OFF (S808 in processing for receiving a display command described later shown in FIG. 116). The predetermined winning number for which the stopping order is notified during the second ART is, for example, the above-mentioned winning numbers “12” and “25”.

  The “pseudo bonus penalty flag” is a flag that is set to ON in the penalty determination process (see FIG. 117) described later when the stop operation is performed in the stop order different from the notified stop order, and the game wins the pseudo bonus. It is. Also, the “pseudo bonus penalty flag” is referred to in a lamp control task (see FIG. 121) described later.

<Description of operation of main control circuit>
Next, contents of various processing executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 99.

[Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing of the pachislot 1 performed by the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to a main flowchart (hereinafter referred to as a main flow) shown in FIG.

  First, when the pachi slot 1 is powered on, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at power on (S1). In this initialization process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the setting has been properly changed, etc., and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. Here, the designated storage area is, for example, a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each game, such as an internal winning combination storing area and a display combination storing area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 46S and the start switch 64 is checked. The details of the medal acceptance / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 79 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts random number values (0 to 65535), and stores the extracted random number values in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95 (S4). Next, the main CPU 93 extracts the effect random number for use in controlling the reel effect and lock in the “continuous lock state”, and the extracted effect random number is stored in the effect random number storage area provided in the main RAM 95 (Shown) (S5). In the present embodiment, the effect random number value 1, the effect random number value 2, and the effect random number value 3 are provided as the effect random number values. These effect random number values 1 to 3 are extracted from the range of 0 to 65535, respectively.

  Then, when the extracted various random number values are stored in the predetermined random number value storage area, the main CPU 93 performs internal lottery processing (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs game lock lottery processing (S7). The details of the game lock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel stop initialization processing (S8). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs start command transmission processing (S9). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a start command to the sub control circuit 101. The start command is configured to include parameters specifying an internal winning combination and the like, and information as to whether or not the occurrence of a game lock has been determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a game start lock process (S10). In this process, the reel effect and lock at the time of game start corresponding to the type of reel effect and lock performed in the "continuous lock state" determined in the process of S8 are mainly performed. The details of the game start lock process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs wait processing (S11). In this process, when the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed from the start of the previous game, the main CPU 93 digests the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel rotation start processing (S12). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests start of rotation of all the reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, the drive of the three stepping motors is controlled by an interrupt process (see FIG. 99) described later which is executed in a fixed cycle (1.1172 msec), and the left reel 3L The rotation of the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is controlled to accelerate until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, and thereafter, it is controlled to maintain the constant speed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a drawing priority storing process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the attraction priority data and stores the data in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the leading priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel stop control processing (S14). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 93 stores data of the symbol code storage area (symbol code storage area 2 and thereafter in FIG. 45) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41). Further, in this process, after the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are all stopped, the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line (winning determination line) and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15) Match Then, the main CPU 93 may determine whether or not the display combination is displayed on the activated line, and may store the determination result in the display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal payout processing (S16). In this process, the driving of the hopper 43 and the update of the number of credits are performed based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S15, and the medals are dispensed. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15), the number of medals inserted is three, and the number of medals paid out differs depending on the display combination, but the maximum payout The number of sheets (the payout upper limit) is 14 sheets.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs RT control processing (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 manages the RT gaming state. The details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs payout end command transmission processing (S18). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a payout end command to the sub control circuit 101.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs bonus end check processing (S19). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to various counters for managing an end timing of the bonus game and checks whether or not the operation of the bonus game is ended. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs bonus operation check processing (S20). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game, and whether or not to play again. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 described later. When the bonus operation check process is completed, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2, and repeats the processes after S2.

[Medal acceptance and start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the medal reception / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic input request (S31). The presence or absence of the automatic insertion request is performed by determining whether the automatic insertion counter is "0". That is, the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic insertion request when the automatic insertion counter is “0”, and determines that there is an automatic insertion request when the automatic insertion counter is “1” or more.

  The automatic insertion counter is data for identifying whether or not a display combination relating to replay is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination relating to the re-game is established, medals for the number inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

  In S31, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic input request (when the determination in S31 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an automatic input process (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic insertion counter is copied to the insertion number counter, and then the value of the automatic insertion counter is cleared. After that, the main CPU 93 performs the process of S39 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S31 that there is no request for automatic insertion (when the determination in S31 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs medal acceptance permission (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 46 (see FIG. 3) is driven, and the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 is accepted. The accepted medals are counted and then guided to the hopper 43.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S34). Specifically, in the BB3 (RB3) gaming state, the maximum number of inserted sheets is set to "1", and in the other gaming states (BB1, BB2 gaming state and general gaming state), the maximum number of inserted sheets is "3". Set to ".

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). When the main CPU 93 determines that the medal acceptance is not permitted in S35 (when the determination in S35 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S39 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S35 that the medal acceptance is permitted (when the determination in S35 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs medal insertion check processing (S36). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether a medal has been inserted, and adds “1” to the inserted number counter when the medal is inserted.

  Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control circuit 101 (S37). The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of inserted cards and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the inserted number is the game startable number (S38). In S38, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inserted number is not the game startable number (when the determination in S38 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35, and repeats the process from S35. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S38 that the inserted number is the game startable number (when the determination in S38 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S39 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the start switch is on (S39). When the main CPU 93 determines in S39 that the start switch is not on (when the determination in S39 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes in and after S35.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S39 that the start switch is on (when the determination in S39 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this processing, the solenoid of the selector 46 (see FIG. 3) is not driven, and the inserted medal is discharged from the medal payout opening 18. When this process ends, the main CPU 93 ends the medal acceptance / start check process, and shifts the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Internal lottery process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described. In the present embodiment, an internal lottery process using various internal lottery tables described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 doubles as means for executing the internal lottery process (internal winning combination determination means).

  First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the gaming state (S41). That is, the main CPU 93 grasps the current gaming state with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), and determines the type and number of lottery times of the internal lottery table based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 18). decide. The lottery number indicates the number of times the subtraction of the lottery value and the determination as to whether or not the digit has occurred for each winning number defined by the internal lottery table.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs lottery value change processing (S42). In this process, the lottery value of the winning number relating to the re-game is changed according to the gaming state. The details of the lottery value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires random number values stored in the random number value storage area (S43). Then, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as an initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 93 obtains a lottery value corresponding to the winning number with reference to the internal lottery table, and subtracts the lottery value from the random value (S44).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the calculation result at S44 is less than 0 (negative value) (S45).

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S45 that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when the determination in S45 is NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number and the winning number (S46). Specifically, the value of the operation result is a random number, and the winning number is incremented by one.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether all the winning numbers have been checked (S47). When it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 93 has not checked all the winning numbers (S47 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S44, and repeats the processes in and after S44.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (if YES in S47), the main CPU 93 sets "0" as a data pointer (S48). That is, the main CPU 93 sets “0” as the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

  Here, returning to the description of the process of S45 again, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) in S45 (in the case of YES determination in S45), the main CPU 93 determines that the current In accordance with the winning number, the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are acquired (S49).

  Then, after the processing of S48 or S49, the main CPU 93 obtains an internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer with reference to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 25 to 28). (S50).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (S51).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is "00000000" (S52). When the main CPU 93 determines in S52 that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not "00000000" (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the processing in S55 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S52 that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is "00000000" (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the internal winning combination determination table for bonus ( Referring to FIG. 24, the internal winning combination is obtained based on the bonus data pointer (S53).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storage area (S54).

  After the process of S54, or if S52 is NO, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S55).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CB gaming state is in progress (S56). In S56, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not in the CB gaming state (S56 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). .

  On the other hand, in S56, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CB gaming mode is in progress (when the determination in S56 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on all the bits corresponding to the small winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area ( S57). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Lottery value change process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the lottery value changing process performed in S42 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 80) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT gaming state flag is on with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether “1” is set in any of the bits 0 to 4 in the gaming state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 42). When the main CPU 93 determines in S61 that the RT gaming state flag is not on (S61 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value change processing, and the processing is an internal lottery processing (see FIG. 80). Move to S43 of).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S61 that the RT gaming state flag is on (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 93 selects the internal lottery table for RT corresponding to the RT gaming state being on. The lottery value of the winning numbers ("1" to "24") related to the re-game in the internal gaming table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 19) is changed (S62). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the lottery value changing process, and shifts the process to S43 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 80).

[Game lock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the game lock lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the RT4 gaming state is in progress (S71). In S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game is not in the RT4 gaming state (S71 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process, and shifts the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 78) .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game is in the RT4 gaming state in S71 (when the determination in S71 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the game lock lottery table (see FIG. 39) and sets random value 1 for effect. Based on the game lock lottery is performed (S72).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game lock has been won in the game lock lottery in S72 (S73). In S73, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game lock is not won (S73 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process, and the process is performed in S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Transfer to

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S73 that the game lock has been won (when the determination in S73 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets a game lock flag and a lock timer. As a result, the game lock is generated. Then, the main CPU 93 ends the game lock lottery process, and shifts the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Reel stop initialization process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 acquires the number for rotating and stopping based on the internal winning combination obtained in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. 78 with reference to the number selection table for rotating and stopping (refer to FIG. 29). (S101).

  Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initialization setting table (see FIG. 30) and acquires various information corresponding to the rotation stop number based on the acquired rotation stop number (S102). Specifically, the main CPU 93 corresponds to the acquired number for stopping rotation, pull-in priority table selection table number, pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, forward push The time table change initial data and the irregular press time table selection data are acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier “0FFH (11111111B)” in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) (S103).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores "3" in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 95 (S104). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initialization setting processing, and shifts the processing to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Lock process at game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the game start lock process performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets a reel effect pattern according to the game lock flag (S111). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the value of the lock timer is “0” (S112). In S112, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the lock timer is not “0” (when S112 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S112 until the value of the lock timer becomes “0”. stand by.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S112 that the value of the lock timer is “0” (when the determination in S112 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the lock processing at the game start, and the main flow of processing ( Move to S11 of FIG. 78).

[Import priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, a drawing priority priority storage process performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 stores the stop button non-operation counter in the main RAM 95 as the number of searches (S121). Next, the main CPU 93 executes search target reel determination processing (S122). In this process, for example, the main CPU 93 selects a predetermined reel from the rotating reels, and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

  For example, in S122, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is determined as the search target reel first. Thereafter, various processes up to S131 to be described later are performed on the left reel 3L, and when the process returns to S122 again, the middle reel 3C is determined as a search target reel next. Then, various processes up to S131 to be described later are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when the process returns to S122 again, the right reel 3R is determined as a search target reel next.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs pull-in priority order table selection processing (S123). In this process, the pull-in priority order table is selected based on the internal winning combination (small combination / replay data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority order table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as symbol position data, and sets "21" as the symbol check count (S124). Then, the main CPU 93 performs symbol code storage processing (S125). In this process, a symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data, which is located on the effective line (winning determination line) of the search target reel, is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, symbol codes corresponding to the number of effective lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 41) based on the acquired symbol code and the data of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) (S126). At this time, regardless of the presence or absence of the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storage area based on the stop symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the information on the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the displayable part corresponding to the symbol code storage area) is updated for each stopped reel. At this time, the displayable part may be obtained from data prepared in advance that indicates the correspondence between the symbol of the stopped reel and the corresponding displayable part, or the symbol of the stopped reel And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 12 to 15) may be collated and acquired. When the former method is used, the correspondence between the symbol and the displayable part changes for each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs pull-in priority order acquisition processing (S127). In this process, for the main CPU 93, the drawing priority is given to the combination in which the bit is "1" in the display combination storing area (see FIG. 41) and the bit is "1" in the internal winning combination storing area. Acquisition priority data is acquired with reference to the order table (see FIG. 37).

  In addition, when the symbols of “C_B_CH_A” to “C_B_CH_D” and “C_C_CH” shown in FIG. In the case of a reel that is "ANY", it does not acquire the attraction priority data of that role. In addition, when there is a possibility that a winning combination is not determined and a winning combination not determined in the internal winning combination may be determined, the attraction priority data is set to “stop prohibition (all bits 0)”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired drawing priority data into the drawing priority data storage area (see FIG. 46) (S128). At this time, the drawing priority order data is stored in the drawing priority order data storage area so that the value of each priority order corresponds to the bit of the storage area. Next, the main CPU 93 adds one to the symbol position data and subtracts one from the number of symbol checks (S129).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S130). In S130, when the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol check count is not 0 (when S130 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S125, and repeats the process from S125.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S130 that the number of symbol checks is 0 (when the determination in S130 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of searches has been searched (S131).

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S131 that the search has not been performed for the number of searches (when the determination in S131 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S122 and repeats the processes after S122. On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the main CPU 93 has searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S131 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the drawing priority storing process and proceeds to S14 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Transfer to

[Import priority table selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the drawing priority order table selection process performed in S123 in the flowchart of the drawing priority order storage process (see FIG. 85) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the drawing priority order table number is set, that is, whether or not the drawing priority order table number is directly stored in the reel stop initial setting process (S8) (S141). ). In S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the drawing priority order table number is set (when the determination in S141 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the drawing priority order table selection processing, and the processing is stored in the drawing priority order storage It moves to S124 of processing (refer to FIG. 85).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pull-in priority order table number is not set in S141 (when S141 is NO), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 44) and the operation stop button. With reference to the area (see FIG. 43), the corresponding lead-in priority order table number is set (S142). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the drawing priority order table selection process, and moves the process to S124 of the drawing priority order storage process (see FIG. 85).

  In S142, the main CPU 93 first acquires data of the pressing order and the operation stop button with reference to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area. Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the drawing priority table selection table corresponding to the drawing priority table selection data, and acquires the drawing priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. After that, the main CPU 93 sets the acquired drawing priority order table number.

[Symbol code acquisition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, symbol code acquisition processing performed in S125 of the flowchart of the retraction priority storage processing (see FIG. 85) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S151). In the present embodiment, the pay line (winning determination line) is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 93 sets check position data of a search target reel based on the search symbol position and the valid line data (S152). For example, in the case where the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire middle information of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle is set.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (S153). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the symbol code storage processing, and shifts the processing to S126 of the drawing priority storage processing (see FIG. 85).

[Reel stop control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the reel stop control process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described. In the present embodiment, the reel stop control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 doubles as means (stop control means) for executing the reel stop control process.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether a valid stop button has been pressed (S161). In S161, when the main CPU 93 determines that the effective stop button is not pressed (when the determination in S161 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the processing of S161 and the pressing operation of the effective stop button is executed. Wait up to.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the valid stop button has been pressed in S161 (when the determination in S161 is YES), the main CPU 93 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 44) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 43) is updated (S162). Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts one from the stop button non-operation counter (S163).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S164). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S165).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs sliding symbol number determination processing (S166). The details of the sliding symbol number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 101 (S167). The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of sliding symbols, and the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch. The information on the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S166, and stores the determined planned stop position in the main RAM 95 (S168). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the number of sliding symbols to the stop start position, and sets the result as the planned stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the planned stop position determined in S168 as a search symbol position (S169). Next, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code acquisition processing described with reference to FIG. 87 (S170). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 45) using the acquired symbol code (S171).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs control change processing (S172). The details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the pressed stop button has been released (S173). In S173, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button is not released (when S173 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the processing of S173 and stands by until the pressed stop button is released. Do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the pressed stop button has been released in S173 (when the determination in S173 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S174). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 101. At this time, the data configuration of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S167. However, the information of ON edge / OFF edge included in the reel stop command transmitted in S174 is different from the information of ON edge / OFF edge included in the reel stop command transmitted in S167.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the stop button non-operation counter is “0” (S175). When the main CPU 93 determines in S175 that the inactivity counter is not "0" (when the determination in S175 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the retraction priority storage processing described with reference to FIG. 85 (S176). ). After that, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S161 and repeats the processes after S161.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S175 that the inactivity counter is "0" (when the determination in S175 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control processing, and the main flow processing (FIG. 78). Move to S15 of reference).

[Sliding piece number determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the process for determining the number of sliding symbols performed in S166 of the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 selects line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on the line mask data table (not shown) (S181). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main CPU 93 sets “10000000” in which “1” is set to bit 7 corresponding to “left reel A line” of the stop data as line mask data. Choose Further, for example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects “00010000” in which “1” is set to the bit 4 corresponding to “middle reel A line” of the stop data as line mask data. Do. Also, for example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main CPU 93 selects “00000010” in which “1” is set to bit 1 corresponding to “right reel A line” of the stop data as line mask data. Do.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the first stop (stop button non-operation counter is “2”) (S182). When the main CPU 93 determines that the first stop is not made in S182 (when the determination in S182 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs second and third stop processing (S183). The details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 described later. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S191 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S182 that the first stop has occurred (when the determination in S182 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the operation stop button is the left stop button (S184).

  In S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when the determination in S 184 is YES), the main CPU 93 acquires the forward press table selection data and the symbol counter (S 185). In this process, the forward press tab selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initialization setting table (see FIG. 30). Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the stop table for first press at the time of the first push corresponding to the table selection data for the first press, and acquires sliding piece number determination data and change status based on the symbol counter (S186). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S191 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S184 that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when S184 is NO), the main CPU 93 acquires the irregular pressing table selection data, and selects the irregular pressing table. An irregular push stop table corresponding to the data is set (S187). In this process, the irregular press time table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a line change bit check process (S188). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 performs line mask data change processing (S189). The details of the line mask data change processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. After that, the main CPU 93 refers to the irregular press stop table which has been set, and acquires slippage number determination data based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S190).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs priority attraction control processing (S191). In this process, the pull-in priority order data are compared according to each symbol position in the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols “4” from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined. The details of the priority attraction control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the sliding symbol number determining process, and moves the process to S167 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the second and third stop processing performed in S183 in the flowchart of the sliding symbol number determination processing (see FIG. 89) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is the second stop operation (S201). In S201, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the time of the second stop operation (when the determination of S201 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S204 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the second stop operation is being performed (S201 is a YES determination) in S201, the main CPU 93 sequentially presses the stop button (first stop is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not (S202). In S202, when the main CPU 93 determines that forward pressing is not performed (NO in S202), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S204 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S202 that forward pressing is to be performed (YES in S202), the main CPU 93 performs line change bit check processing (S203). The details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 91 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs line mask data change processing (S204). The details of the line mask data change processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 92 described later. Next, the main CPU 93 conducts sliding symbol number search processing (S205). In this process, with reference to the stop table (FIG. 32, FIG. 34 and FIG. 35), the number determination data of sliding symbols is determined based on the stop start position.

  For example, when the line mask data is “00010000” corresponding to “middle reel A line”, the main CPU 93 refers to the column of “middle reel A line” of bit 4. Then, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols from the stop start position, a search is sequentially performed to determine whether the corresponding data is "1". Next, the main CPU 93 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is “1” to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as slide number determination data. Then, after the processing of S205, the main CPU 93 ends the second and third stop processings, and shifts the processing to S191 of the sliding number determination processing (see FIG. 89).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 91, the line change bit performed in S188 in the flowchart of the sliding symbol number determination process (see FIG. 89) and in S203 in the flowcharts of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). The check process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the change status is “1” or “2” (S211). In S211, when the main CPU 93 determines that the change status is “1” or “2” (when the determination in S211 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets a corresponding line status (S212). In this process, in the present embodiment, the A-line status is set when the change status is “1”, and the B-line status is set when the change status is “2”. Then, after the process of S212, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check process, and the process proceeds to S189 of the sliding number determination process (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). ) In step S204).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S211 that the change status is not “1” or “2” (S211 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the line change bit is on. (S213). In this process, the main CPU 93 refers to the row corresponding to the “middle reel line change bit” or the “right reel line change bit” in the stop table (see FIGS. 34 and 35), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is It is determined whether or not it is "1". Then, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not “1”, that is, the line change bit is not on (in the case of NO determination in S213), the main CPU 93 performs line change bit check processing. And the process proceeds to S189 of the sliding number determination process (see FIG. 89) or to S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S213 that the data corresponding to the stop start position is “1”, that is, the line change bit is on (S213 is YES determination), the main CPU 93 performs B The line status is set (S214). The B-line status is data used to change line mask data. Then, after the processing of S214, the main CPU 93 ends the line change bit check processing, and the processing is the flow chart of S189 of the sliding number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). ) In step S204).

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 92, the line mask data performed in S189 in the flowchart of the sliding symbol number determination process (see FIG. 89) and in S204 in the flowcharts of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). The change process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the C-line status is set (S221). The setting of the C-line status is performed when it is a forward push in the second post-stop control change process (see FIG. 95) described later.

  In S221, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C-line status is set (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button or not. It discriminates (S222).

  In S222, when the main CPU 93 determines that the operation stop button at the second stop time is the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the right twice (S223). ). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop will be the right stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from "00000010" to "10000000" by the process of S223. As a result, the column of bit 7 corresponding to the "right reel C line data" in the stop table for the forward press second and third stops (see FIG. 35) is referred to. Then, after the process of S223, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change process, and the process proceeds to S190 of the sliding number determination process (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 90). Move to the process of S205 in).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S222 that the operation stop button at the second stop is not the middle stop button (when the determination in S222 is NO), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the left twice. (S224). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is not the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from "00010000" to "01000000" by the process of S224. As a result, the column of bits 6 corresponding to the "middle reel C line data" of the second / third stop table for stopping at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S224, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is the flow chart of S190 of the sliding number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). Move to the process of S205 in).

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the C line status is not set in S221 (when the determination in S221 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the B line status is set (S225). . When the main CPU 93 determines that the B line status is not set in S225 (when S225 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and the number of sliding symbols determination processing (FIG. 89) or S205 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the B-line status is set in S225 (when the determination in S225 is YES), the main CPU 93 rotates the line mask data to the right once (S226). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is "00000010", it is changed to "00000001". As a result, the column corresponding to “B line data” in the stop table (see FIGS. 34 and 35) is referred to. Then, after the processing of S226, the main CPU 93 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is the flow chart of S190 of the sliding number determination processing (see FIG. 89) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 90). Move to the process of S205 in).

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the priority attraction-in control processing performed in S191 in the flowchart of the sliding symbol number determination processing (see FIG. 89) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets a search order table (see FIG. 38) according to the gaming state (S231). Next, the main CPU 93 sets initial values for the search order counter and the number of checks (S232). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets “1” as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main CPU 93 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value to the number of checks. Specifically, "5" is set as an initial value of the number of checks.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the top address of the stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the sliding piece number determination data (S233).

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S234). Next, the main CPU 93 adds the acquired number of sliding symbols to the expected start-of-stop address and acquires pull-in priority data (S235).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the retraction priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the retraction priority data acquired earlier (S236). When the main CPU 93 determines in S236 that the retraction priority data acquired in S235 does not exceed the retraction priority data acquired earlier (in the case of NO determination in S236), the main CPU 93 executes the processing of S238 described later. Do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S236 that the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the pull-in priority data acquired earlier (when S236 is YES), the main CPU 93 slips in S234. The number of frames is retracted (S237).

  Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts one from the number of checks and adds one to the retrieval order counter (S238).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the number of checks is “0” (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is not “0” (when the determination in S239 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S234, and repeats the process from S234.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S239 that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S239 is YES), the main CPU 93 restores the number of sliding symbols saved (S240). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the priority attraction-in control process, and also ends the sliding symbol number determination process (see FIG. 89).

Control change processing
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the control change process performed in S172 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is after the third stop (S251). In S251, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is after the third stop (when the determination is YES in S251), the main CPU 93 ends the control change process, and the process proceeds to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 88). Transfer to

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S251 that it is not after the third stop (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether it is after the second stop (S252). In S252, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is after the second stop (when the determination in S252 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a second post-stop control process (S253). The details of the second post-shutdown control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later. Then, after the processing of S253, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 88).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S252 that it is not after the second stop (when the determination in S252 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not forward pressing is performed (S254). In S254, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not forward pressing (when S254 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S173 in the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 88). .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S254 that the forward press is in progress (when the S254 is a YES determination), the main CPU 93 determines the forward press control change table according to the forward press table change data (see FIG. 33). Is acquired and the number of searches is set (S255).

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a planned stop position (S256). Then, the main CPU 93 updates the change target position according to the acquired planned stop position (S257).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the change target position updated in S257 matches the planned stop position (S258). In S258, when the main CPU 93 determines that the updated change target position does not coincide with the planned stop position (when the determination of S258 is NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the number of searches is “0”. (S259). In S259, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of searches is not “0” (when S259 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S257 and repeats the processes after S257.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S259 that the number of searches is “0” (when the determination in S259 is YES), the main CPU 93 advances the value of the table change initial data at the time of forward pressing. The third stop table number is acquired and the corresponding stop table is set (S260).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets “0” to the C line check data (S261). Then, after the processing of S261, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 88).

  When the main CPU 93 determines in S258 that the updated change target position matches the planned stop position (when the determination in S258 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a second push on the basis of the value of the line change status. The third stop table number and C line check data are acquired (S 262).

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the corresponding stop table based on the forward press second and third stop table numbers for the stop (S263). Then, after the processing of S263, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing, and shifts the processing to S173 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 88).

[Control change processing after second stop]
Next, the second post-stop control change process performed in S253 in the flowchart of the control change process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not forward pressing is performed (S271). When the main CPU 93 determines in S271 that the forward pressing is not performed (S271 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing after the second stop and also ends the control change processing (see FIG. 94). Do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S271 that forward pressing is being performed (S271 is a YES determination), the main CPU 93 determines whether the C line check data is on (change status is “3”) or not It is determined (S272). The C-line check data is acquired by the process of S262 in the control change process (see FIG. 94). When the main CPU 93 determines in S272 that the C line check data is not on (S272 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the second post-stop control change process and also executes the control change process (FIG. 94) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the C line check data is on in S 272 (when the determination in S 272 is YES), the main CPU 93 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the second stop. It is determined whether or not (S273). When the main CPU 93 determines in S273 that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the second stop is not on (when the determination in S273 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process (see FIG. 94) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S273 that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the second stop is on (when the determination in S273 is YES), the main CPU 93 stores the stored order "1" is added to the second and third stop table numbers for stop, and the corresponding stop table is set (S274). Next, the main CPU 93 sets the C line status (S275). Then, after the processing of S275, the main CPU 93 ends the control change processing after the second stop and also ends the control change processing (see FIG. 94).

[RT control processing]
Next, RT control processing performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the RT control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 91.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17), and checks the transition condition of the RT gaming state which can be established in the RT gaming state of the transition source (current) (S281).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether a transition condition of the RT gaming state is established (S282). When the main CPU 93 determines in S282 that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is not satisfied (when the determination in S282 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S284 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S282 that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is satisfied (when the determination in S282 is YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 17) and transitions. Based on the conditions, the RT gaming state flag of the transition destination is set to a predetermined bit of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 42), and the gaming state flag storage area is updated (S283).

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs display command transmission processing (S284). Specifically, the main CPU 93 transmits a display command to the sub control circuit 101. The display command is configured to include parameters for specifying a display combination, the number of payouts, and the like. Then, after the processing of S284, the main CPU 93 ends the RT control processing, and shifts the processing to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Bonus end check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the bonus end check process performed in S19 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether "MB" ("MB1" or "MB2") is in operation with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) (S321). When the main CPU 93 determines that the "MB" is not in operation in S321 (when the determination in S321 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and proceeds to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78). Transfer to

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is in operation in S321 (when S321 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0". (S322).

  In S322, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (when the determination in S322 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs bonus end processing (S323). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the gaming state flag (MB gaming state flag) corresponding to the "MB" in operation. When the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the payout of medals exceeds 13 during the MB gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs bonus end command transmission processing (S324). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus end command to the sub control circuit 101. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs initialization processing at the end of the bonus (S325). Then, after the processing of S325, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S322 that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (in the case of NO determination in S322), the main CPU 93 determines each value of the number-of-winnings counter and the possible number-of-games counter. Update (S326). The value of the possible wins counter is decremented by "1" when the small winning combination (the combination with the payout of medals) is displayed, and the value of the possible plays counter is "1" in one game regardless of the stop symbol. It is subtracted.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the value of the number-of-winnings counter or the value of the possible-to-play counter is “0” (S327). In S327, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the number-of-winnings counter or the value of the possible number-of-games counter is not “0” (S327: NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process. Then, the process proceeds to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S327 that the value of the number-of-winnings counter or the value of the possible number-of-games counter is “0” (when S327 is YES), the main CPU 93 processes at CB end (S328). Specifically, processing is performed such as turning off the gaming state flag (CB gaming state flag) corresponding to “CB”, clearing the values of the possible number-of-winnings counter and the possible number-of-games counter. Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process, and shifts the process to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the bonus operation check process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether "MB" ("MB1" or "MB2") is in operation (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 93 determines that “MB” is not in operation (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S334 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that "MB" is in operation in S331 (when S331 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether "CB" is in operation (S332). ). In S332, when the main CPU 93 determines that “CB” is in operation (when the determination in S332 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and the processing is performed in the main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S332 that "CB" is not in operation (when S332 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs CB operation processing based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 16). (S333). Then, after the processing of S333, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

  When the determination in S331 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether the bonus game is a winning (S334). In the present embodiment, the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to "C_MB1" or "C_MB2" is a winning of the bonus game. When the main CPU 93 determines in S334 that the bonus game is not winning (when the determination in S334 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S338 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S334 that the bonus game is a winning (when the determination in S334 is YES), the main CPU 93 selects a bonus game that has won based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 16). A corresponding bonus operation process is performed (S335). In this embodiment, in this processing, the main CPU 93 sets “1” to the corresponding bit in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 42) with reference to the bonus operation time table (see FIG. 16), The value of the bonus end sheet number counter is set to a predetermined value ("13"). Furthermore, in this process, the process at the time of CB operation described in the above S333 is also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S336). Next, the main CPU 93 performs bonus start command transmission processing (S337). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits a bonus start command to the sub control circuit 101. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has been started. Then, after S337, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and shifts the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

  When the determination in S334 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combination related to replay (replay) is a prize (S338). In S338, when the main CPU 93 determines that the combination associated with the re-game is not a prize (if S338 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process is a main flow (see FIG. 78). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines in S338 that the combination associated with the re-game is a winning (when the determination in S338 is YES), the main CPU 93 requests automatic medal insertion (S339). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. Then, after the processing of S339, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 78).

[Interrupt process under control of main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, an interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93 performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 78) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S341). Next, the main CPU 93 performs input port check processing (S342). In this process, the signals input from various switches such as the stop switch of the stop switch substrate 65 are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs timer update processing (S343). In this process, the main CPU 93 executes, for example, a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer every interrupt process. Next, the main CPU 93 performs communication data transmission processing (S344). In this process, various commands are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101 as appropriate.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs reel control processing (S345). In this process, the main CPU 93 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R when required to start the rotation of all the reels, and thereafter rotates each reel at a constant speed, Drive control of three stepping motors. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the effective line (winning determination line) of the display window). The drive control of the corresponding stepping motor is performed so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the normal acceleration process, the constant speed process and the stop process described above in the process of S345, when the reel effect pattern is set at the acceleration process, the reel effect pattern is supported. It also performs control processing of reel effect (reel action) and lock.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs lamp 7 segment drive processing (S346). In this process, the main CPU 93 controls driving of the 7-segment display 23, and displays the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 performs register restoration processing (S347). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt processing.

<Description of operation of sub control circuit>
Next, contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

Main board communication task
First, with reference to FIG. 100, the main board communication task performed by sub CPU 102 will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs reception check of the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 (S501). Next, when the sub CPU 102 receives a command, the sub CPU 102 extracts the type of the received command (S502).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a normal command type (S503). In the present embodiment, the command type is associated with any of a plurality of types of codes, and when the game is operating normally, the type of the command is any of the plurality of types of codes. Therefore, in the process of S502, if the received code of the command type is any of a plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that the type of command is normal. On the other hand, when the code of the command type is other than a plurality of types of codes, the sub CPU 102 determines that some abnormality (including cheating) has occurred during the game, and determines that the type is not a normal command.

  In S503, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the type of the command is not normal (S503 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S501, and repeats the process from S501.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the type of the normal command is the one in S 503 (if YES in S 503), the sub CPU 102 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S 504). . The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S504, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S501, and repeats the processing of S501 and thereafter.

[Registration registration task]
Next, the effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 fetches a message from the message queue (S511). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is a message in the message queue (S512). In S512, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when S512 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S515 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S512 that there is a message in the message queue (when the determination in S512 is YES), the sub CPU 102 copies game information from the message (S513). In this process, for example, various data specified by parameters, such as internal winning combination, type of reel whose rotation has stopped, display combination, gaming status flag, etc., is copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 103 Ru.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs effect content determination processing (S514). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs determination of effect contents, registration of effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. The details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 registers animation data (S515). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers sound data (S516). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers lamp data (S517). Then, the sub CPU 102 registers the feature data (S518). Note that these registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process of S514. After S518, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S511, and repeats the processes after S511.

[Determination content determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the effect content determination processing performed in S514 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is time to receive a start command (S521).

  In S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the start command has been received (when the determination in S 521 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing when a start command is received (S 522). In this process, the sub CPU 102 extracts a random number for effect, and determines and registers an effect number by lottery based on an internal winning combination and the like. Here, the effect number is data for specifying the content of the effect to be executed this time. The details of the start command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 registers effect data at the time of start according to the registered effect number (S523). The effect data is data designating animation data, sound data, lamp data and feature data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and the effect such as the display of an image is executed. Then, after the process of S523, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S521 that the start command has not been received (when the determination in S521 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the reel stop command is received (S524).

  In S524, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the reel stop command is being received (when the determination in S524 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing when receiving the reel stop command (S525). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs additional additional B additional G number lottery if the additional additional B flag is on.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets effect data at the time of stop according to the registered effect number and the type of operation stop button (S526). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S524 that the reel stop command is not received (when the determination in S524 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the display command is received (S527).

  In S527, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display command is received (when the determination in S527 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing when receiving the display command (S528). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs sub gaming state transition processing and penalty determination processing to shift the sub gaming state based on the winning mode. The details of the process at the time of display command reception will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets effect data at the time of display according to the registered effect number and display combination (S529). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S527 that the display command has not been received (when the determination in S527 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the payout end command has been received (S530). In S530, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the payout end command is received (when the determination in S 530 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a payout end command reception process (S531). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S530 that the payout end command is not received (S530 returns NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the bonus start command is received (S532).

  In S532, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 is receiving the bonus start command (when the determination in S532 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets effect data for bonus start (S533). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S532 that the bonus start command has not been received (when the determination in S532 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the bonus end command is received (S534). In S534, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the bonus end command is received (when the determination in S 534 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets effect data for bonus end (S 535). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the bonus end command has not been received in S534 (when the determination in S534 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is a non-operation command received (S536). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the non-operation command has not been received in S 536 (when S 536 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process of determining the effect content and performs the process of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101). Move to S515.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S536 that the no-operation command has been received (YES in S536), the sub CPU 102 performs a no-operation command reception process (S537). The details of the no-operation command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 described later. After the processing of S537, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101).

[Process when receiving start command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a start command reception process performed in S522 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102) will be described. In the present embodiment, the processing at the time of start command reception described below is executed by the sub control circuit 101.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus is in progress (S541). During the pseudo bonus (first ART), one of the SBB flag, the BB flag, and the RB flag is on, and the BB precursor flag and the RB precursor flag are off.

  In S541, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the simulated bonus is being performed (when the determination of S 541 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process during simulated bonus (S 542). The details of the simulated bonus process will be described later with reference to FIG. 104 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the simulated bonus is not in progress in S 541 (if S 541 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not ART (second ART) is in progress (S 543). . During ART (second ART), the ART (second ART) flag is on and the ART precursor flag is off.

  In S543, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART (second ART) is being performed (when the determination in S 543 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process during ART (S 544). The details of the in-ART process will be described later with reference to FIG. 105 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S543 that the sub CPU 102 is not in the ART (second ART) (when the determination in S 543 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the normal middle processing (S 545). The details of the normal middle processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 described later.

  After the processes of S 542 and S 545, the sub CPU 102 performs a process during preparation (S 546). Details of this in-provisioning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later. Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a precursor check process (S547). Details of the precursor check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs effect lottery processing (S548). The details of the effect lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 described later. After the processing of S548, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of start command reception, and shifts the processing to S523 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 102).

[Process during simulated bonus]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the pseudo bonus middle process performed in S542 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the preparation flag of the simulated bonus is on (S561). The preparation bonus of the pseudo bonus includes an SBB preparation flag, a BB preparation flag and an RB preparation flag. Therefore, in S561, the sub CPU 102 determines whether any of the SBB preparation flag, the BB preparation flag and the RB preparation flag is on.

  In S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation bonus of the simulated bonus is on (when the determination of S 561 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the start condition corresponding to each preparation flag is satisfied. (S562). The start condition corresponding to the SBB preparing flag is that a winning number “18” (abbreviated “F_W7_KP_RT4”) is won in the internal lottery process. Also, the start conditions corresponding to the BB preparing flag and the RB preparing flag are winning numbers “14” to “17” (abbreviated “F_R7_KP_RB_0”, “F_R7_KP_RB_1”, “F_RB_KP_R7_0”, “F_RB_KP_R7_1”) in internal lottery processing. It is to win.

  In S562, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the start condition corresponding to each preparation flag is satisfied (when the determination in S 562 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs pseudo bonus start processing (S 563).

  In the pseudo bonus start process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the preparation flag corresponding to the started pseudo bonus, and simulates the value ("100" or "60" or "30") corresponding to the started pseudo bonus. Set in the bonus game counter. In addition, the sub CPU 102 clears the in-provision digestion G number counter. After the processing of S563, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the simulated bonus, and shifts the processing to S546 of the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S 562 that the start condition corresponding to each preparation flag is not satisfied (S 562 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the simulated bonus and receives the start command processing. The process proceeds to step S546 of the hour process (see FIG. 103).

  In S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation flag of the simulated bonus is not on (when S561 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the BB flag is on (S 564).

  In S564, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB flag is on (if S564 is a YES determination), the sub CPU 102 determines the number of G during BB based on the number of G during BB selection lottery table (see FIG. 54). An additional lottery process is performed (S565). When the number of games to be added is determined in the BB-G number-plus-addition lottery process, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined value to the BB high probability counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs ART lottery processing during BB based on the ART lottery table during BB, or performs BR lottery processing during BB based on the BR during BR (Battle Rush) lottery table (S566).

  Specifically, it is BB in non-ART, and a special internal winning combination (the internal winning combination corresponding to winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11") is internal winning by internal lottery processing. If determined to be a role, perform ART lottery processing during BB. Also, it is BB in ART, and a special internal winning combination (internal winning combination corresponding to winning numbers "7", "8", "10", "11") is determined as internal winning combination by internal lottery processing. If so, perform BR lottery processing.

  In the ART lottery process during BB, when “ART winning” is determined, the sub CPU 102 turns on “ART flag” (store “1” in “ART flag”). In addition, when “battle rush 1 win” is determined in the BR during BR lottery process, the sub CPU 102 stores “1” in “BR stock storage area”. Then, when “battle rush 2 winning” is determined, the sub CPU 102 stores “2” in “BR stock storage area”.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the lottery result of S566 is a winning (S567). That is, it is determined whether or not one of “ART winning,” “battle rush 1 winning,” and “battle rush 2 winning” has been determined.

  In S567, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game is a winning (when the determination of S 567 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “reverse push navigation (navition with white BAR)” (S568). Note that “reverse push” in the present embodiment means that the stop order is “right and left middle” or “right, middle and left”.

  The above-mentioned special internal winning combination is an internal winning combination corresponding to winning numbers (small part and replay data pointers) “7”, “8”, “10” and “11”. In the present embodiment, when the winning number (small part and replay data pointer) is “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”, the stop order is “right-left middle” or “right-middle left” On the condition that is, the combination of the symbols corresponding to “C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P” is stopped and displayed.

  When the symbol combination corresponding to "C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P" is stopped and displayed, "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"" along a straight line extending across the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R. It is possible to stop and display the combination of the symbols of "White BAR". Therefore, in the present embodiment, when any one of "ART winning", "Battle rush 1 winning", and "Battle rush 2 winning" is determined, "reverse push navigation (target white bar navigation)" is performed.

  The stop operation is performed according to the "reverse push navigation (aimed at white BAR)", and the combination of "White BAR"-"White BAR"-"White BAR" is stopped and displayed along a straight line. The player can recognize that any one of “ART winning”, “Battle Rush 1 winning”, and “Battle rush 2 winning” has been decided. At this time, if BB in non-ART, "ART winning" is determined, and if BB in ART, "Battle Rush 1 winning" or "Battle rush 2 winning" is determined.

  Even if the small part / replay data pointer (winning number) is “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”, “ART winning”, “Battle Rush 1 winning”, “Battle Rush 2” If none of the winnings has been determined, the "reverse push navigation (targeting a white BAR)" is not performed. That is, even if the stop display of the combination of the symbols of "White BAR"-"White BAR"-"White BAR" is possible, any of "ART winning", "Battle Rush 1 winning" and "Battle Rush 2 winning" If it has not been decided yet either, the "back push navigation (target white bar navigation)" is not performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a special internal winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is determined as an internal winning combination, ART lottery processing during BB or BR lottery processing during BB is performed. However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, the ART lottery processing in BB or the BR lottery processing in BB may be performed even when an internal winning combination other than a special internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery processing.

  For example, when an internal winning combination other than a special internal winning combination is determined, and "ART winning," "Battle Rush 1 winning," or "Battle rush 2 winning" is determined, then, a special inner winning combination is made. When the winning combination ("C_HOM_A" to "C_HOM_P") is determined to be the internal winning combination, "reverse push navigation (aim for white BAR)" is performed. That is, thereafter, when a special internal winning combination (“C_HOM_A” to “C_HOM_P”) is determined to be an internal winning combination, “reverse press” regardless of the result of ART lottery processing in BB or BR in BR. Carry out navigation (to aim at white BAR).

  In S567, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not a winning (in the case of NO determination in S567), the sub CPU 102 performs the gasse reverse push lottery based on the gasse reverse push lottery table (not shown) (S569). In the present embodiment, when the small combination / replay data pointer is “6”, “9”, the gasse reverse push lottery is performed. Then, when the "set reverse press hit" is determined, "reverse press navigation (aim for white BAR)" is performed.

  When the data pointer for small role / replay is “6”, “9”, the ART lottery process during BB and the BR lottery process during BB are not performed. Therefore, when the small part / replay data pointer is "6" or "9", neither "ART winning", "Battle Rush 1 winning", or "Battle rush 2 winning" is determined.

  In addition, when the small part / replay data pointer is “6”, “9”, “C_HOM_B” to “C_HOM_J” and “C_B_REP_A” to “C_B_REP_P” are determined as duplicates as internal winning combinations ( 25 and 26)). Then, if the small part / replay data pointer is "6", "9", it is changed to "C_B_REP_A" to "C_B_REP_P" on condition that the stop order is "right-left middle" or "right-middle-left". The combination of the corresponding symbols is stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, when the small part / replay data pointer is "6" or "9", the stop order is "right-left middle" or "right-middle-left" as "reverse push navigation (target aiming at white BAR)". However, the combination of the symbols "White BAR"-"White BAR"-"White BAR" is not displayed as a stop. As a result, the player can recognize that neither “ART winning”, “battle rush 1 winning”, nor “battle rush 2 winning” has been determined.

  When “C_HOM_B” and “C_HOM_E” to “C_HOM_G” are determined as internal winning combinations, “white BAR”-“white BAR” until the second stop if the timing of the stop operation is a predetermined timing. -A combination of symbols of "white BAR" is a stop mode (so-called "tempay") that can be stopped and displayed along a straight line. And in the 3rd stop, the combination of the design of "white BAR"-"white BAR"-"white BAR" is not stopped and displayed.

  After the processes of S568 and S569, or if S564 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the RB flag is on (S570).

  In S570, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RB flag is on (when S 570 is a YES determination), the sub CPU 102 performs ART lottery processing during RB based on ART lottery table during RB (not shown). Alternatively, the RB in-BR BR lottery processing is performed based on the in-RB BR lottery table (not shown) (S571).

  Specifically, when the RB in a non-ART, and the data pointer for small part and replay (the winning number) is “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”, the number of ART sets in RB Perform lottery processing. On the other hand, when the RB in the ART and the data pointer for small role / replay (the winning number) are “7”, “8”, “10”, “11”, the BR inside lottery processing is performed.

  After the process of S571, or if S571 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the BB middle high probability counter is 1 or more (S572). In S572, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB middle high probability counter is 1 or more (when the determination in S572 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value of the BB middle high probability counter (S573). .

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S572 that the BB high probability counter is not 1 or more (S572 is NO), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the simulated bonus in-game counter ( S 574).

  After the processes of S573 and S574, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the simulated bonus in-game counter is 1 or more (S575). In S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the counter for the simulated bonus game number is 1 or more (when the determination in S 575 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the simulated bonus and receives the start command processing. The process proceeds to step S546 of the hour process (see FIG. 103).

  In S575, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the simulated bonus in-game number counter is not 1 or more (when the determination in S 575 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs pseudo bonus end processing (S 576).

In the pseudo bonus end processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the flag corresponding to the type of the pseudo bonus which has been ended. Further, when the ART flag is on and the value of the ART game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 performs an ART start process. When the type of simulated bonus that has ended is SBB, the sub CPU 102 turns on the ART flag and performs processing at ART start. Further, when “1” or “2” is stored in the BR stock storage area, the sub CPU 102 performs processing at BR start.
After the processing of S576, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing during the simulated bonus, and shifts the processing to S546 of the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

[Processing during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the ART in-progress process performed in S544 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (S581). The BR flag is either BR flag 1 or BR flag 2.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is not off in S581 (when the determination in S581 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines that the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 53) is used. A bonus lottery process is performed (S582).

  When the "bonus win" is determined by the bonus lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs bonus sort lottery process based on the bonus sort lottery table (not shown) to determine the type of bonus (simulated bonus). Then, a flag corresponding to the determined bonus ("SBB flag", "BB flag" or "RB flag"), and a preparation in progress flag ("SBB preparation in progress flag", "BB preparation in progress flag" or "RB preparation in progress flag" Turn on).

  After the processing of S 582, the sub CPU 102 performs the additional lottery processing based on the additional lottery table (not shown) (S 583). When the number of additional games is determined by the additional lottery process, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined number of additional games to the ART game number counter. The BR lottery processing may be performed separately from the additional lottery processing.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the "in preparation flag (ART preparing flag)" is on or the navi return wait state flag is on (S584). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation in progress flag is on or the navigation return waiting state flag is on in S 584 (when the determination in S 584 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing in ART, The processing moves to S546 in the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation in progress flag is not on and the navigation return waiting state flag is not on in S 584 (when the determination in S 584 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the value of the ART game number counter. "1" is subtracted (S585).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs ART withdrawal processing (S586). Note that details of the ART withdrawal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S586, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing in ART, and shifts the processing to S546 in the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

  In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR flag is on and the BR precursor flag is off (when the determination in S581 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is 1 or more. It is determined whether or not (S587).

  In S587, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S587 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the value of the additional added game number counter. (S588). Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” and the additional added A flag is on (S589).

  In S589, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional addition game number counter is “1” and the additional addition A flag is on (YES in S589), the sub CPU 102 performs the addition additional A addition. G number lottery processing is performed (S590). In the additional added A added G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the added game number based on the added added A added G number lottery table (see FIG. 61), and adds the determined added game number to the ART game number counter. . After the processing of S 590, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing in ART, and shifts the processing to S 546 in the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

  In S589, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional additional game number counter is “1” and the additional additional A flag is not on (when the determination in S 589 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines the additional additional game number. It is determined whether the value of the counter is "0" (S591).

  In S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is not “0” (when S 591 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing in ART, and the processing is received when the start command is received. It moves to S546 of processing (refer to FIG. 103).

  In S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is “0” (when the determination in S591 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds an additional additional C flag (“additional additional C1 flag”, It is determined whether the additional addition C2 flag or the additional addition C3 flag is on (S592).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S592 that the additional addition C flag is on (when the determination in S592 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition C addition G number lottery processing (S593). That is, in the additional added C added G number lottery process in S593, the operation for the start lever 16 is performed before the additional added C added G number G lottery process based on the operation on the MAX bet button 14 (1 bet button 15) is completed. Will be executed if

  In the additional added C added G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the added game number based on the added added C added G number lottery table (see FIG. 63), and adds the determined added game number to the added game number counter. .

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is "continue" (S594). If “1” or more is determined as the number of added games by the additional added C added G number lottery process of S593, “Continuous” is set, and “0” is determined as the added game number by additional added C added G number lottery process. If it does, it will be "No continuation".

  In S594, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is "continue" (if S 594 is YES), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S593, and adds the number of added games as a number of added games by the additional added C added G number lottery process of S593. The processes of S593 and S594 are repeated until "0" is determined. If the number of times the additional addition C addition G number lottery processing has reached a specified number (for example, 1000 times), “no continuation” is determined, and the additional addition C addition G number G lottery processing is finished Good. In addition, when the number of times the additional addition C added G number lottery processing has reached a specified number, the sub CPU 102 determines that “no continuation”, even if the result of the lottery is “continue”, The additional addition C addition G number G lottery processing may end.

  In S594, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not “continuation” (when the determination of S 594 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional addition C end processing (S 595). In the additional addition C end processing, the sub CPU 102 sets the corresponding additional addition flag ("additional addition A flag", "additional addition B flag", "additional addition C1 flag", "additional addition C2 flag" or "additional addition C3" Turn off the flag). Further, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the additional game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter, and clears the value of the additional game number counter.

  After the processing of S595, or if S592 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the BR continuation processing (S596). The details of the BR continuation time process will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 described later. After the processing of S596, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing in ART, and shifts the processing to S546 in the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S587 that the value of the additional added game number counter is not "1" or more (when the determination in S587 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the BR continuation flag is "1" or more. It is determined (S600).

  In S600, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is “1” or more (when S600 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition and promotion lottery processing (S601).

  In addition addition and promotion lottery processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the addition content based on the addition addition and promotion lottery table (see FIG. 60), and an addition addition flag ("addition addition A flag") corresponding to the determined addition content. "Additional additional B flag", "additional additional C1 flag", "additional additional C2 flag" or "additional additional C3 flag" is turned on.

  Note that only one additional addition flag is turned on. In addition, although there is a case in which additional addition moves to the upper level, it does not move to the lower side. For example, if the additional content determined this time is higher than the additional content determined last time, the additional additional flag corresponding to the previously determined additional content is turned off, and the additional additional flag corresponding to the additional content determined this time is turned on. . On the other hand, if the added content determined this time is lower than the previously determined added content, the addition added flag corresponding to the previously determined added content is maintained on.

  In S600, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is not "1" or more (when S600 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs BR continuous rewrite lottery processing (S602).

  In the BR continuous rewrite / lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs lottery on whether or not to rewrite “discontinuity” of BR into “continuation” based on the BR continuous rewrite / lottery table (not shown). Then, when it is determined to rewrite “discontinuance” of BR to “continuing”, processing is performed at BR continuation time (see FIG. 108).

  After the processing of S601 and S602, the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the BR game number counter (S603). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the BR game number counter is “1” or more (S604). In S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR game number counter is “1” or more (S604 is YES determination), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing in ART, and the processing at the time of start command reception ( Move to S546 of FIG.

  In S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR game number counter is not "1" or more (S604 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the BR continuation flag is "1" or more. (S605).

  In S605, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is not "1" or more (S605 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 performs processing at the end of BR (S 606). In the BR end processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR flag ("BR1 flag 1" or "BR2 flag"). Also, if the flag that has been turned off is "BR2 flag", or if the number of times of BR continuation is a predetermined number (for example, "20 or more"), sub CPU 102 is "SBB flag", "SBB preparation in progress flag" And the "BR1 flag" are turned on. After the processing of S606, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing in ART, and shifts the processing to S546 in the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

  In S605, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BR continuation flag is “1” or more (when the determination in S 605 is “YES”), the sub CPU 102 performs addition lottery processing at BR continuation time (S 607). In the BR continuation time addition processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of addition games based on the BR continuation addition lottery table (not shown), and adds the determined number of addition games to the value of the ART game number counter. In addition, in the BR continuation-time additional lottery processing of the present embodiment, “0” is not determined as the number of additional games, and a predetermined number (for example, “10”) or more is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the additional addition flag is on (S608). In S608, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition flag is on (when the determination in S 608 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "2" to the value of the additional addition game number counter (S609). After the processing of S609, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing in ART, and shifts the processing to S546 in the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

  In S608, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition flag is not on (when the determination in S 608 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs BR continuation processing (S610). After the processing of S610, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing in ART, and shifts the processing to S546 in the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the ART withdrawal processing performed in S586 in the flowchart of the processing during ART (see FIGS. 105 and 106) will be described. The ART withdrawal process is a process for performing a so-called withdrawal process in which "50" is reset to the ART game number counter at a predetermined probability during the second ART in which the sub gaming state is the second.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the ART game number counter is “0” (S611).

  In S611, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not “0” (when the determination in S 611 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ART withdrawal processing and also performs the ART in progress processing (FIG. 105 and FIG. 106) are also finished.

  In S611, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is “0” (when the determination in S 611 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs ART pullback lottery processing (S612). In the ART withdrawal lottery process, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process using random numbers on the program, and when the result of the lottery is a win, sets “50” to the ART game number counter again. Specifically, when the sub CPU 102 subtracts a predetermined lottery value from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767 in the present embodiment, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment), and the result of the subtraction becomes negative, Determined to be winning. The value of the predetermined lottery value can be arbitrarily set, but in the present embodiment, it is set, for example, to "3000" so that the probability of performing the pullback is 1% or less.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the ART game number counter is “0” (S613). If no pull back is performed in the ART pull back lottery process of S612, the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is “0” because the value of the ART game number counter remains “0”. It discriminate | determines (S613 YES determination). Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the ART pullback process, and also the in-ART process (see FIGS. 105 and 106).

  If a pullback is performed in the ART pullback lottery process of S612, the sub CPU 613 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not "0" because "50" is set again in the ART game number counter. It carries out (S613 NO determination). Then, the sub CPU 102 turns on the navigation return waiting state flag (see FIG. 77) (S614), terminates the ART withdrawal processing, and terminates the in-ART processing (see FIGS. 105 and 106).

[BR continuous processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the BR continuation time process performed in S595 and S606 in the flowchart of the process in ART (see FIGS. 105 and 106) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR continuation flag (S621). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds “10” to the value of the BR game number counter (S 622). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BR next-to-next continuation flag is “1” (S623).

  In S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BR next successive flag is “1” (when the determination in S 623 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BR continuation flag and stores the BR next successive storage area “ 2 "is set (stored) (S624).

  In S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BR next consecutive flag is not "1" (when the determination in S 623 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs BR continuous lottery processing (S 625). In the BR continuous lottery processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether to continue BR based on the BR1 continuous lottery table or the BR2 continuous lottery table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to continue BR in S625 is determined (S626). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the continuation of BR is not determined in S 626 (when the determination of S 626 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of BR continuation and also performs the processing during ART (FIG. 105 and FIG. See also 106).

  After the processing of S624, or if the determination of S626 is YES, the sub CPU 102 performs processing when determining BR continuation (S627). The details of the BR continuation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 described later. After the processing of S627, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of continuing the BR, and also ends the processing during ART (see FIGS. 105 and 106).

[Processing at BR continuation determination time]
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the BR continuation determination processing performed in S627 in the flowchart of the BR continuation processing (see FIG. 108) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs additional addition lottery processing during BR (S641). In the BR during additional addition lottery processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the additional addition content based on the BR during addition additional lottery table. Then, an additional additional flag ("additional additional A flag", "additional additional B flag", "additional additional C1 flag", "additional additional C2 flag" or "additional additional C3 flag") corresponding to the determined additional additional content is Turn on.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BR continuation flag (S642). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs continuous lottery processing next to BR (S643). In the BB next-following continuous lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to "continue" the next-to-last BR, based on the BR next-following successive lottery table (not shown). Then, when it is determined to "continue" the next-to-last-time BR, "1" is stored in the next-to-first-round successive storage area. If the value of the BR next-to-last continuous storage area is “2”, the BR next-to-next continuous lottery processing is not performed. After the processing of S643, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the BR continuation determination time, and also ends the processing at the BR continuation time (see FIG. 108).

[Normal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the normal middle processing performed in S545 in the flowchart (see FIG. 103) of the processing at start command reception will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not CZ is in progress (S661). During CZ, the CZ flag is on and the CZ precursor flag is off. When the sub CPU 102 determines that the CZ is not in progress in S 661 (when the determination in S 661 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs mode lottery processing (S 662).

  In the present embodiment, in the general state, a plurality of modes are provided in which the winning rate of CZ and the winning rate of bonus (simulated bonus) are different. In mode lottery processing, the sub CPU 102 determines a mode based on a mode lottery table (not shown), and shifts to the determined mode.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a CZ rush lottery process (S663). In the CZ rush lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not CZ is won based on the CZ rush lottery table (not shown). Then, when the winning of the CZ is determined, the CZ flag and the CZ precursor flag corresponding to the determined CZ are turned on. Further, the number of precursor games is determined based on the precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and the determined number of precursor games is stored in the precursor game counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs bonus lottery processing based on the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 53) (S664). If the winning of the bonus is determined by the bonus lottery process, the type of bonus ("SBB", "BB" or "RB") is determined based on the bonus distribution lottery table (not shown). Then, the flag (“SBB flag”, “BB flag” or “RB flag”) and the precursor flag (“BB precursor flag” or “RB precursor flag”) corresponding to the determined bonus are turned on. Further, the number of precursor games is determined based on a precursor game number lottery table (not shown), and the number of determined precursor games is stored in the precursor game counter. After the processing of step S664, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal middle processing, and shifts the processing to step S546 of the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

In S661, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the CZ is being performed (when the determination of S661 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a CZ during cut-in additional lottery process (S665). In CZ during cut-in additional lottery processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether to add “1” to the prescribed number based on the CZ during cut-in additional lottery table (see FIG. 51). Then, when it is determined to add “1” to the prescribed number, “1” is added to the CZ in-CI count counter.
In addition, as CZ during cut-in additional lottery processing according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it may be determined whether or not “2” or more is added to the prescribed number.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning number "4" (abbreviated "F_C_BAR1") is won (S666). In S666, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning number "4" (abbreviated "F_C_BAR 1") is won (when S666 is a YES determination), the sub CPU 102 selects "reverse push navigation (target navigation with black BAR)". Is set (S667).

  When winning the winning number "4" (abbreviated "F_C_BAR1"), the stop order is "right-left middle" or "right-middle-left" and the stop operation timing is a predetermined timing (aim for the black BAR) The combination of the symbols concerning "C_BAR_A"-"C_BAR_E" is stopped and displayed on condition of. Thereby, when winning number "4" is won and the stop order is "right / left middle" or "right middle left", "black BAR"-"black BAR corresponding to" C_BAR_A "depending on the timing of the stop operation. -There is a possibility that the symbol combination of "black BAR" may be stopped. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the winning number “4” (abbreviated “F_C_BAR1”) is won, “reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at black BAR)” is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning number “4” (abbreviated “F_C_BAR1”) is won during CZ, the winning of the bonus is determined. Therefore, the player performs the stop operation according to the "reverse push navigation (target aiming at the black BAR)", and when the combination of the symbols "Black BAR"-"Black BAR"-"Black BAR" is stopped and displayed, the player , It can be recognized that a bonus (simulated bonus) is won.

  After the process of S667, the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus winning process (S668). In the bonus winning process, the sub CPU 102 determines the type of bonus (“SBB”, “BB” or “RB”) based on the bonus distribution / lottery table (not shown). Then, a flag corresponding to the determined bonus ("SBB flag", "BB flag" or "RB flag") and a preparation in progress flag ("SBB preparation in progress flag", "BB preparation in progress flag" or "RB preparation in progress flag" Turn on).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ end processing (S669). In the CZ end processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the CZ flag, and clears the values of the CZ game number counter and the CZ in-CI counter. After the processing of step S669, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal middle processing, and shifts the processing to step S546 of the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

  In S666, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning number "4" (abbreviated "F_C_BAR 1") is not won (when S666 is NO), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the CZ game number counter. (S670).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs cut-in occurrence / lottery processing during CZ (S671). The CZ during cut-in generation / lottery process determines whether or not to generate a cut-in (“reverse push navigation (black bar aiming navigation)”) based on the CZ during cut-in generation / lottery table (see FIG. 52) .

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to generate a cut-in (S672). When it is determined in S672 that the sub CPU 102 is not successful in generating the cut-in (when S672 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal middle processing and performs processing when the start command is received ( Move to S546 of FIG.

  When it is determined in S672 that the sub CPU 102 is successful in generating the cut-in (if S672 is a YES determination), the sub CPU 102 sets "reverse push navigation (navigation aiming at black BAR)" (S673). ).

  In the present embodiment, when “losing” is determined by the internal lottery process, in S671, it is determined whether or not a cut-in (“reverse push navigation (aim for black BAR)”) is to be generated. Therefore, even if it is determined in S671 that a cut-in is to be generated, and the stop operation is performed as in the "reverse push navigation (black BAR aiming navigation)", "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" The symbol combination of "" is not displayed stopped.

  In the stop table selected at the time of “losing” in the present embodiment, the right is displayed if the stop order is “right-left middle” and the stop operation timing is a predetermined timing (aim for the black BAR). In the window 4R and the middle display window 4C, the number of sliding pieces capable of stopping the "black BAR" is set. This makes it possible to maintain the expectation that the combination of the symbols "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" is stopped and displayed until the second stop.

  After the processing of S673, the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the CI count counter during CZ (S674). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the CI count counter during CZ is “0” (S675). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the CI count counter during CZ is not “0” in S 675 (when the determination in S 675 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the normal processing and receives processing when the start command is received. It moves to S546 of processing (refer to FIG. 103).

  In S675, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the CI counter during CZ is “0” (when the determination in S 675 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a causal value related process (S 676). The details of the causal value-related process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs CZ end processing (S677). After the processing of S677, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal middle processing, and shifts the processing to S546 of the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

[Causal value related processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the causal value related process performed in S676 in the flowchart of the normal process (see FIG. 110) and in S723 in the flowchart of the process in preparation (see FIG. 112) will be described.
In addition, the causal value related process of this embodiment is performed at various timings based on conditions according to various causal value lottery tables.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs a causal value accumulation lottery process (S701). In the causal value accumulation lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines a causal value based on various causal value accumulation lottery tables (see FIGS. 64 to 72), and adds the determined causal value to a causal value counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the causal value counter exceeds “100” (S702). In S702, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter does not exceed "100" (in the case of NO determination in S702), the sub CPU 102 ends the causal value related processing, and the processing during normal processing ( It moves to S677 of (see FIG. 110) or S724 of the processing in preparation (see FIG. 112).

  In S702, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter exceeds "100" (when the determination in S702 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the causal value stock counter (S703). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts “100” from the value of the causal value counter (S704). After the processing of S704, the sub CPU 102 ends the causal value related processing, and shifts the processing to S677 in the normal processing (see FIG. 110) or S724 in the preparation processing (see FIG. 112).

[Processing in preparation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the process under preparation performed in S546 in the flowchart of the process at the time of start command reception (see FIG. 103) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether preparation is in progress (S721). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the preparation is not in progress in S 721 (when the determination in S 721 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the preparation process, and proceeds to S 547 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103). Move.

  In S721, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 is in preparation (when the determination in S721 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the in-provision digested G number counter (S722). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs causal value related processing (S723).

  After the process of S723, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the operating condition is satisfied with reference to the operating condition table (see FIG. 76) (S724). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the operating condition is not satisfied in S 724 (when S 724 is NO), the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding in-preparation flag and clears the value of the in-provision digest G number counter. (S725). After the processing of S725, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing in preparation, and shifts the processing to S547 in the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

Precursor check processing
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the precursor check processing performed in S547 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is a precursor (S741). During the sign, the value of the sign game counter becomes “1” or more. When the sub CPU 102 determines in S 741 that the warning is not in the warning (when the determination in S 741 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the warning check processing and proceeds to S 548 in the processing at start command reception (see FIG. 103). Move.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S741 that the sub CPU 102 is in the middle (when the determination in S741 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts “1” from the value of the precursor game number counter (S742). However, if the preparation-in-progress flag is on, the value of the precursor game number counter is not decremented by one.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter has become “0” (S 473). In S743, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter is not “0” (when the determination in S 743 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check process and receives the start command processing. The process proceeds to step S548 of the hour process (see FIG. 103).

  In S743, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the precursor game counter has become "0" (when the determination in S 743 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ start time (S 744) . Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the CZ start time is in accordance with the CZ precursor flag ("CZ1 precursor flag" or "CZ2 precursor flag").

  In S744, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the CZ start is in progress (when the determination in S 744 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a CZ start processing (S 745).

  In the CZ start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the corresponding precursor flag, and sets an initial value according to the type of the CZ flag in the CZ CI count counter. In the present embodiment, the initial value when the CZ1 flag is on is “4”, and the initial value when the CZ2 flag is on is “10”. After the processing of S745, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check processing, and shifts the processing to S548 of the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

  In S744, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not at the CZ start time (when S744 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is the bonus start time (S746). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus start time is based on a precursor flag ("BB precursor flag" or "RB precursor flag") related to the pseudo bonus.

  In S746, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the bonus start time has come (when the determination in S 746 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus start process (S 747). In the bonus start process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the precursor flag and executes the bonus start process according to the flag ("SBB flag", "BB flag" or "RB flag") related to the pseudo bonus which is on. Do.

  If the SBB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the SBB preparation flag, and if the BB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB preparation flag. If the RB flag is on, the sub CPU 102 turns on the RB in-provision flag. After the processing of step S747, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check processing, and shifts the processing to step S548 of the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

  In S746, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not at the bonus start time (when S746 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is the ART (second ART) start time (S 748). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not ART (second ART) is started by the ART precursor flag.

  In S748, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART (second ART) is started (when the determination in S 748 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an ART start process (S 749). In the ART start processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the precursor flag and turns on the ART preparing flag. However, if the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the ART preparing flag is not turned on. Further, in the ART start processing, the sub CPU 102 sets “50” to the ART game number counter. After the processing of step S749, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check processing, and shifts the processing to step S548 of processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

  In S748, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the ART (second ART) start time (when S748 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is the BR start time (S 750). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is a BR start time based on the BR precursor flag.

  In S750, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the BR start time (when S 750 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check processing, and the processing in the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103) S548. Transfer to

  In S750, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the BR start time (when the determination in S 750 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the BR precursor flag (S 751). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs BR continuation processing (S752). After the processing of step S752, the sub CPU 102 ends the precursor check processing, and shifts the processing to step S548 of the processing upon start command reception (see FIG. 103).

[Production lottery process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the effect lottery process performed in S548 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 103) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs effect number lottery processing (S761). In the effect number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the effect number lottery table (not shown) and determines the effect number based on various parameters stored in the sub storage area. Then, the determined effect number is stored in the sub storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is a development effect (failure) (S762). In S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is not a development effect (failure) (if S762 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S768.

  In S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect corresponding to the determined effect number is the development effect (failure) (when S 762 is YES determination), the sub CPU 102 performs a temporary causal value lottery process (S 763) . In the provisional causal value lottery processing, the sub CPU 102 refers to the provisional causal value lottery table and determines a provisional causal value based on the type of the development effect. Then, the determined temporary causal value is stored in the sub storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a causal value determination process (S764). In the causal value determination process, the sub CPU 102 corrects the determined provisional causal value to the maximum value within the range of internal points, and determines it as a causal value. Then, the determined causal value is added to the value of the causal value counter. Also, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the same value as the determined causal value from the value of the internal point counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the causal value counter exceeds “100” (S765). In S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter does not exceed "100" (when the determination in S 765 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S 768.

  In S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the causal value counter exceeds “100” (when the determination in S 765 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the value of the causal value stock (S766) .

  Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts “100” from the value of the causal value counter (S767). After the processing of S 767, if S 762 or S 765 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lock effect is generated (S 768). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines the presence or absence of the lock effect based on the parameter of the start command.

  In S768, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the lock effect is not generated (when the determination in S 768 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 103). Do. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the lock effect has occurred (when the determination in S 768 is YES), the sub CPU 102 saves the effect number determined in S 761 in the save area after the end of the lock effect (S 769).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs fake effect parameter lottery processing (S770). The fake effect parameter is a parameter for determining the effect number of the fake effect in the same process as the normal (performed in S761) effect number lottery process, and is a parameter which is a substitute for the internal winning combination.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the development effect or the determination screen is in progress (S771). Here, “in the decision screen” means that a screen for notifying that the bonus is decided is being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  In S771, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the development effect is not in progress or in the finalized screen (when S771 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs an effect number lottery process using the fake effect parameter determined in S770 ( S772). After the processing of S772, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery processing, and also ends the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

  In S771, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the development effect is being performed or the finalized screen is in progress (when the determination in S771 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs fake push order navigation effect lottery processing (S773). After the processing of S773, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect lottery processing, and also ends the start command reception processing (see FIG. 103).

[Reel stop command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the reel stop command reception process performed in S525 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” (S 781). In S781, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is not “1” (when the determination in S 781 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception processing and produces the processing. The process moves to S526 in the content determination process (see FIG. 102).

  In S781, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” (when the determination in S 781 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the additional added B flag is on. (S782). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S 782 that the additional addition B flag is not on (S 782 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception processing, and the processing is processing for effect contents determination (FIG. Move to S526 of step 102).

  In S782, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition B flag is on (when the determination in S782 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs additional additional B addition G number lottery processing (S783). In the additional added B added G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the added game number based on the added added B added G number lottery table, and adds the determined added game number to the added game number counter.

  In the additional added B added G number lottery process, the number of added games determined in the previous stop operation is referred to. The number of added games determined by the previous stop operation is acquired with reference to the added game number counter.

  After the processing of S783, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the third stop operation (S784). In S784, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation is not the third stop operation (when the determination in S 784 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception processing, and the processing is the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 102). Move to S526 of).

  In S784, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation is the third stop operation (when the determination in S 784 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional addition B end processing (S 785). In the additional addition B end processing, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional addition B flag. Also, the value of the additional game number counter is added to the ART game number counter, and the value of the additional game number counter is cleared. After the processing of S 785, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and shifts the processing to S 526 of the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 102).

[Process when receiving display command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the process at the time of display command reception performed in S528 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102) will be described. In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs sub gaming state transition processing and penalty determination processing to shift the sub gaming state based on the winning mode.

  First, the sub CPU 102 refers to various flags in the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) to determine whether the sub gaming state is normal (S801). The sub CPU 102 controls the sub storage area "CZ1 flag", "CZ2 flag", "SBB flag", "BB flag", "RB flag", "ART flag", "BR1 flag", "BR2 flag" and "ART" When these flags are off, it is determined that the sub gaming state is normal, with reference to the flag under preparation.

  In S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is normal (when the determination in S 801 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a sub gaming state transition process during normal (S 802). Specifically, when the CZ precursor flag ("CZ1 precursor flag" or "CZ2 precursor flag") of the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) is on and the number of CZ precursor games is 0, the sub CPU 102 Migrate during CZ. Further, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus, and the BB precursor flag of the sub storage area is on and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub gaming state is shifted between the flags. Further, when the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the ART precursor flag is off, and the ART precursor game number is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to ART preparation. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S816 after the sub gaming state shift processing (S802) in the normal state.

  In S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not normal (when S 801 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the CZ flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area, and the sub gaming state is It is determined whether or not CZ is in progress (S803). If the CZ flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is CZ.

  In S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is CZ (when the determination in S 803 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a sub gaming state transition process in C Z (S 804). Specifically, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus, and the BB precursor flag of the sub storage area is on and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub gaming state is shifted between the flags. Further, when the CZ during CI counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to the normal state. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S816 after the sub gaming state transition processing (S804) in CZ.

  In S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not CZ (when the determination in S 803 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART in-provision flag of the sub storage area (see FIG. 77). It is determined whether the state is in preparation for ART (S805). If the ART preparing flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is ART preparing.

  In S805, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is in the ART preparation (when the determination in S 805 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the sub gaming state transition processing in the ART preparation (S 806). Specifically, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus, and the BB precursor flag of the sub storage area is on and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub gaming state is shifted between the flags. Further, when ART rush replay, that is, any of “C_small V_REP_A” to “C_small V_REP_C” is won, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to ART. Further, when the player performs the stop operation in the stop order different from the notified stop order, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to ART. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub gaming state transition process (S806) in the ART preparation.

  In S805, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not in the ART preparation (when the determination in S 805 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area and It is determined whether or not it is in ART (S807). If the ART flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is ART.

  In S807, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is ART (when S 807 is YES determination), the sub CPU 102 refers to the navigation return waiting state flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area. The navigation return waiting state flag is on, and whether or not the first stop operation (the first stop operation) is performed on other than the left reel 3L, or the navigation return waiting state flag is on, and The main control circuit 91 determines whether or not the predetermined winning number relating to the notification of the stopping order has been determined by the main control circuit 91. The sub CPU 102 determines, based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91, whether the number is a predetermined winning number relating to the notification of the stop order. The predetermined winning number related to the notification of the stopping order in the ART (second ART) is, for example, the above-mentioned winning numbers “12” and “25”.

If it is determined in S808 that the navi return wait state flag is on and the first stop operation is performed on other than the left reel 3L, or if the navi return wait state flag is on, a predetermined stop notification is issued. If it is the winning number (if YES in S808), the sub CPU 102 turns off the navigation return waiting state flag (S809). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S810.
In the present embodiment, when the navigation return waiting state flag is on, the sub gaming state is "second ART", but the liquid crystal display device 11 is in a normal state (for example, the sub gaming state is "general state" The same screen as the one displayed at the time) is displayed. Moreover, in this case, the stop operation by forward pressing is recommended. Therefore, when the stop operation (abnormal press) is performed in the stop order other than the forward push when the navigation return waiting state flag is on, the main CPU 93 determines a predetermined winning number related to notification of the stop order as a penalty. Even if not, set the navigation return waiting status flag to off. Therefore, the ART game number counter is decremented from the next game (see S584 and S585 in FIG. 105).

  In S808, when the navigation return waiting state flag is off, it is not determined that the first stop operation (the first stop operation) has been performed for other than the left reel 3L, or for notification of the stop order If it is not such a predetermined winning number (if S809 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S810.

  In S810, the sub CPU 102 performs sub gaming state transition processing in ART. Specifically, when the sub CPU 102 wins the pseudo bonus, and the BB precursor flag of the sub storage area is on and the number of BB precursor games is 0, the sub gaming state is shifted between the flags. Further, when the ART game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to the normal state. When the BR game number counter is 1 or more, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub game state to BR. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S816 after the sub gaming state transition processing (S810) in ART.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S 807 that the sub gaming state is not ART (when S 807 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the BR 1 flag and the BR 2 flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area. It is determined whether the gaming state is BR (S811). If the BR1 flag or the BR2 flag is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is BR.

  In S811, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is in BR (when the determination in S811 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a sub gaming state transition process in BR (S 812). Specifically, sub CPU 102 refers to “BR stock storage area 1” to “BR stock storage area 32” (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area, and stores “1” and “2” in all of them. If not, i.e., if there is no BR stock, the BR game counter is 0, and if SBB is won, that is, there is SBB stock, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state between flags. Further, when there is no BR stock and the BR game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to ART. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S816 after the sub gaming state transition processing (S812) in BR.

  In S811, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not BR (when S 81 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the flag between the flags of the sub storage area (see FIG. 77), and the sub gaming state It is determined whether or not it is between flags (S813). If the flag between flags is on, the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is between flags.

  In S813, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is between flags (when the determination in S 813 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a sub gaming state transition process between flags (S 814). Specifically, when the RT gaming state is the RT3 state, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to the first ART, that is, to the simulated bonus. Further, when the player performs the stop operation in the stop order different from the notified stop order, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to the simulated bonus. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S816 after the processing of shifting to the sub gaming state between the flags (S814).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs sub gaming state transition processing during the simulated bonus (S815). Specifically, when the bonus game number counter is 0 and the simulated bonus is not won during the simulated bonus, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to the normal state. Further, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state between the flags when the bonus win game number counter is 0 and the pseudo bonus is won during the pseudo bonus. Further, when the bonus game number counter is 0 and the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the sub CPU 102 shifts the sub gaming state to ART preparation. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S816 after the sub gaming state transition process (S815) in the simulated bonus.

  The sub CPU 102 performs a penalty determination process at S816. In the penalty determination process, the sub CPU 102 performs the stop operation in the stop order different from the notified stop order, and turns on the pseudo bonus penalty flag (see FIG. 77) when the pseudo bonus is established. Details of the penalty determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the penalty determination process (S816), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of display command reception.

[Penalty judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the penalty determination process performed in S816 in the flowchart of the process at the time of display command reception (see FIG. 116) will be described. The penalty determination process is a process of turning on the pseudo bonus penalty flag (see FIG. 77) when the stop operation is performed in the stop order different from the notified stop order and the pseudo bonus is established.

  For example, if the determined type of pseudo bonus is RB and the rotation stop number (see FIG. 48) is “14” to “17”, the sub CPU 102 is a combination of symbols relating to “C_BNS * 2”. (The combination of symbols in which the type of simulated bonus is RB and the first ART is started to be displayed when stopped is displayed.) The stop order for stopping display is notified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, when the rotation stop number is “14” or “15”, “right / left middle” or “right middle / left” is notified as the stop order. When the rotation stop number is "16" or "17", "left middle right" or "left right middle" is notified as the stop order. Then, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notified stop order and the combination of symbols relating to "C_BNS * 2" is stopped and displayed, the first ART in which the type of pseudo bonus is RB is started.

  However, even if the determined type of simulated bonus is RB and the number for rotation stop is “14”, “15”, the sub CPU 102 reports “middle right or middle left” or “right middle left” as the stop order. The person may perform the stop operation in the “left middle right” or “left right middle” stop order without following the stop order. In addition, even if the determined type of simulated bonus is RB and the number of rotation stop is "16", "17", the sub CPU 102 reports "left middle right" or "left right middle" as the stop order, but the game is There is a case where the person does not follow the stopping order and performs the stopping operation in the “right / left middle” or “right middle left” stopping order. In these cases, when the symbol combination relating to “C_BNS * 1” is stopped and displayed, the first ART whose pseudo bonus type is BB is started. As described above, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order different from the notified stop order and the pseudo bonus is established, the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus penalty flag in the penalty determination process. At this time, the sub CPU 102 turns off the RB flag of the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) and turns on the BB flag. In addition, when the type of the simulated bonus determined is BB, and the stop operation is performed without following the stop order notified by the player, and the combination of the symbols related to "C_BNS ※ 2" is stopped and displayed. Also, the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus penalty flag in the penalty determination process. At this time, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BB flag of the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) and turns on the RB flag. The sub CPU 102 performs the stop operation in the stop order different from the notified stop order, and turns off the pseudo bonus penalty flag when the simulated bonus started when the simulated bonus is established.

  As shown in FIG. 117, first, in the penalty determination processing, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the simulated bonus is in progress (S817). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the sub storage area (see FIG. 77) and determines that the pseudo bonus is in progress if any of the "SBB flag", "BB flag" and "RB flag" is on. If the flag is not on either, it is determined that the pseudo bonus is not in progress.

  If it is determined in S817 that the pseudo bonus is not being executed (if S817 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty determination process.

  In S817, when it is determined that the simulated bonus is being performed (S817 is a YES determination), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the simulated bonus is established by neglecting navigation, that is, the stop operation is performed in the stop order different from the notified stop order. Is performed, and it is determined whether or not the simulated bonus is won (S818). When the stop operation is performed in the notified stop order and the simulated bonus is won, the sub CPU 102 determines that the simulated bonus is not established by neglecting the navigation.

  In S818, when it is determined that the pseudo bonus is not established by neglecting the navigation (when the determination in S818 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty determination process.

  When it is determined in S818 that the pseudo bonus is established by neglecting the navigation (when the determination in S818 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the pseudo bonus penalty flag (see FIG. 77) of the sub storage area (S819). After S819, the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty determination process.

[Process when receiving no operation command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the no-operation command reception process performed in S537 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” (S 820). In S820, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is not “1” (when the determination in S 820 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S 827.

  In S820, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the additional added game number counter is “1” (when the determination in S 820 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the additional added C flag is on or not. (S821). In S821, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional addition C flag is not on (when S821 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S827.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S821 that the additional addition C flag is on (when the determination in S821 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the number of inserted cards is the game startable number (S822). If the inserted number is the game startable number, the start operation can be accepted.

  In S822, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the insertion number is not the game startable number (when S822 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S827. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the insertion number is the game startable number (when the determination in S 822 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the BET switch 62 is on (S 823). The BET switch 62 performs on-edge detection when the MAX bet button 14 (one bet button 15) is pressed.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in S823 that the BET switch 62 is not on (if S823 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S827. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S823 that the BET switch 62 is on (if YES in S823), the sub CPU 102 performs additional additional C additional G number lottery processing (S824).

  In the additional added C added G number lottery process, the sub CPU 102 determines the added game number based on the added added C added G number lottery table. Then, the determined additional game number is added to the value of the additional game number counter. When the number of additional games “1” or more is determined in the additional additional C additional G number lottery process, “continuation” of the additional additional C is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether “continue” is determined in the additional added C added G number lottery process (S 825). In S825, when the sub CPU 102 determines that "continue" is determined (when S825 is YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S827.

  In S825, when the sub CPU 102 determines that "continue" is not determined (when the determination in S 825 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs an additional addition C end processing (S826). In the additional addition C end process, the sub CPU 102 turns off the additional addition C flag (“additional addition C1 flag”, “additional addition C2 flag” or “additional addition C3 flag”). Further, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the additional game number counter to the value of the ART game number counter. Then, the value of the additional game number counter is cleared.

  If S820, S821, S822, or S823 is 23 NO after the process of S826, and if S825 is YES, the sub CPU 102 performs a lock effect control process (S827). The details of the lock effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119 described later. After the process of S827, the sub CPU 102 ends the process when no operation command is received, and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIG. 102).

[Lock production control processing]
Next, lock effect control processing performed in S827 in the flowchart of the no-operation command reception processing (see FIG. 118) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the RT gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is the RT4 gaming state (S828). Information on the RT gaming state controlled by the main CPU 93 is sent from the main CPU 93 to the sub CPU 102 as a parameter such as a start command. In S828, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S 828 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S 832.

  In S828, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (when the determination in S 828 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is preparing an ART during the sub gaming state or during the first ART (simulated bonus) It is determined whether it is other than (S829). In S829, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is not in the ART preparation or in the first ART (simulated bonus) (when S829 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S832.

  In S829, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub gaming state is other than in ART preparation or in the first ART (simulated bonus) (when S829 is YES determination), the sub CPU 102 is locked by the control of the main CPU 93 It is determined whether or not the effect brake has been started (S830).

  When the lock effect (hereinafter referred to as "main lock effect") under control of the main CPU 93 according to the present embodiment is started, first, the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are forwardly rotated. Next, a brake is generated on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R to stop the forward rotation. Then, after the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are reversely rotated, the main lock effect is ended. The information indicating that the forward rotation, the brake, the stop, and the reverse rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are started is included in, for example, the no-operation command.

  In S830, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the brake of the main lock effect is not started (when S 830 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S 832.

  In S830, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the brake of the main lock effect has been started (when the determination in S 830 is YES), the sub CPU 102 starts delay count (S 831). In this process, the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 is set in the delay counter. After the process of S831, the sub CPU 102 ends the lock effect control process, and also ends the no-operation command reception process (see FIG. 118).

  If S828, S829 or S830 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the delay is being counted (S832). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the delay count is not in progress in S 832 (when S 832 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S 837.

  In S832, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the delay count is in progress (when the determination in S 832 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the main lock effect is in progress (S833). In S833, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the main lock effect is not in progress (when the determination in S 833 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S 837.

  In S833, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the main lock effect is being performed (when S 833 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the value obtained by subtracting the value of the delay counter from the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 exceeds 1000000. It is determined (S834).

  In this embodiment, the clock number of the sub CPU 102 is acquired in S831 and set in the delay counter. That is, with the number of clocks of the sub CPU acquired in S831 as a count start point, it is determined whether or not the number of clocks obtained by adding the number of 1000000 clocks from the number of clocks is acquired from the sub CPU 102.

  In the present embodiment, when the clock count obtained by adding the number of 1000000 clocks from the number of clocks set in the delay counter is acquired from the sub CPU 102, one second has elapsed since the clock count of the sub CPU is set in the delay counter. Do. Therefore, in S831, it is determined whether one second has elapsed since the generation of the main lock effect brake.

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the value obtained by subtracting the value of the delay counter from the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 does not exceed 1000000 in S 834 (when S 834 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S 837.

  In S834, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value obtained by subtracting the value of the delay counter from the number of clocks of the sub CPU 102 exceeds 1000000 (YES in S 834), the sub CPU 102 performs subblock effect determination processing ( S 835). In the sublock effect determination process, a lock effect (hereinafter referred to as "sublock effect") under the control of the sub CPU 102 is determined according to the internal winning combination, the sub game state, and the like.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 ends the delay count (S836). In this process, the value of the delay counter is cleared.

  After the process of S 836, if S 832, S 833 or S 834 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the main lock effect has ended (S 837). That is, it is determined whether the effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R has ended. In S837, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the main lock effect has not ended (when S837 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the lock effect control processing and performs processing when no operation command is received (FIG. 118). See also).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines in S837 that the main lock effect has ended (when the determination in S837 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect number stored in the save area after the end of the lock effect (S838). As a result, the effects determined before the occurrence of the game lock (effects determined before performing the fake effect and the sablock effect) are executed after the game lock is completed.

  After the process of S838, the sub CPU 102 ends the lock effect control process, and also ends the no-operation command reception process (see FIG. 118).

[Effect pertaining to game lock]
Next, the effects to be performed when the game lock occurs will be described.

  In this embodiment, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a game lock during the RT4 gaming state (see FIGS. 39 and 82). When the occurrence of the game lock is determined, the game lock is started, and even if the insertion operation or the stop operation is performed until the predetermined period elapses, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed.

  In the period in which the game lock is generated, the main CPU 93 (main control circuit 91) executes the main lock effect. The main lock effect is a reel effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and operates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the order of forward rotation, brake, stop, reverse rotation.

  On the other hand, when the game lock occurs, the sub CPU 102 stores the effect number determined by the effect number lottery process in the storage area after the end of the lock effect (S769 in FIG. 114). Then, the fake effect is determined and executed (see S770 and S772 in FIG. 114). This fake effect can be determined in the effect number lottery process which is normally performed by using the fake effect parameter. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of program design and debugging relating to lottery of fake effect.

  The fake effect is the same as the effect performed in a normal game (a game in which no game lock occurs), and is performed using the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 20L, 20R, and the like. Therefore, the player can not determine whether it is the fake effect during the game lock or the effect to be executed in the normal game. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to misunderstand that the normal game has been started while the main lock effect is being rotated in the forward direction and the fake effect is being performed.

  When the brake of the main lock effect is generated, the sub CPU 102 (sub control circuit 101) counts the number of clock cycles of the CPU until one second has elapsed since the generation of the brake (see S830, S831 and S834 in FIG. 119). ). Then, when one second has passed since the brake of the main lock effect is generated, the sublock effect is determined and executed (see S 835 in FIG. 119). That is, when one second has passed since the brake of the main lock effect is generated, the effect performed using the display device is changed from the fake effect to the Sablock effect.

In Sublock effect, transition to a simulated bonus (first ART) or ART (second ART) using the liquid crystal display device 11 or the speakers 20L, 20R, etc. (transition to a game state advantageous to the player) Inform that the has been decided. That is, in the Sublock effect, an image different from the image displayed in the effect performed in the normal game is displayed.
Note that when the game lock and the main lock effect end, an effect corresponding to the effect number stored in the storage area after the end of the lock effect is performed by the control of the sub CPU 102.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate in the same manner as when a normal game is played, and then a brake is generated. However, the fake effect under the control of the sub CPU 102 (the same as the effect performed in a normal game) is sustained for 1 second after the brake is generated. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and to increase the sense of expectation for the notification of the information by the effect relating to the game lock.

  Next, referring to FIG. 120 to FIG. 123, a character control task, a lamp control task, a sound control task, and an animation control task executed by the sub CPU 102 will be described. These tasks (processing) are executed in parallel by the sub CPU 102. Also, these tasks are repeatedly executed by the sub CPU 102 in a cycle of 33 msec.

[Item control task]
First, the item control task will be described with reference to FIG. The item control task is a task that performs management control of the rotating object 123.

  In S901 of the role control task, the sub CPU 102 takes out the role data registered in S518 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and shifts the processing to S902 (S901). If there is no registered feature data (including the case where it has already been taken out), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S902.

  In S902, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is registered feature data (S902). If it is determined in S902 that there is no registered feature data (if S902 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S905.

  If it is determined that there is a character data registered in S902 (if YES in S902), the sub CPU 102 acquires a character feature rendering sequence from the character sequence table based on the character data taken out (S903) . The feature presentation sequence is composed of data indicating the pattern of the presentation on the rotation combination 123 (data indicating the rotation direction, the number of rotations, the rotation time, etc., hereinafter may be referred to as the feature pattern data). The feature presentation sequence may be composed of a single feature presentation pattern data or a combination of a plurality of feature presentation pattern data. Some of the feature pattern data making up the feature presentation sequence has a start condition set to start rendering of the pattern indicated by the feature pattern data. As the start condition, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the rotation start of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation ON (ON edge), release of pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation OFF (OFF edge, reception of display command), payout. In addition, with regard to each of the character item pattern data constituting the character item effect sequence, the character item effect sequence is a character object pattern data (hereinafter referred to as interlocked character object pattern data Data that indicates whether or not it is referred to. The feature presentation sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of feature presentation sequences, and associates feature data with a feature presentation sequence.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired bonus game effect sequence as bonus game effect sequence data to be referred to in the subsequent processing (S904).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a feature effect sequence data update process (S905). In this process, it is determined whether the start condition of each piece of character pattern data making up the set-up item effect sequence data is correct or not, and if it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, the rotating object 123 is selected by the pattern of the piece of character pattern data. Instruct the item control board 78 to operate. For example, the character data registered in S518 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101) is the character data A, and start of the character pattern data A constituting the character effect sequence data A associated with the character data A If the sub-control circuit 101 receives a reel stop command relating to the first stop operation when the condition is the first stop operation, the sub CPU 102 determines that the start condition of the character pattern data A is satisfied, and the character pattern data The character control board 78 is instructed to operate in the pattern of A so that the rotary product 123 operates.

  In the case where the character pattern data following the character pattern data A constituting the character effect sequence data A is the character pattern data B and the start condition of the character pattern data B is the second stop operation, the character pattern data When the auxiliary control circuit 101 receives a reel stop command relating to the second stop operation while the rotary product 123 is operating in the pattern of A, the sub CPU 102 determines that the start condition of the product pattern data B is satisfied. Then, the sub CPU 102 instructs the character control board 78 to operate so that the rotary character 123 stops operating with the pattern of the character pattern data A and operates with the pattern of the character pattern data B. In the same case, when the rotary product 123 ends the operation with the pattern of the character pattern data A before the sub control circuit 101 receives the reel stop command according to the second stop operation, the rotary product As to whether the sub CPU 102 instructs the character control board 78 to perform the operation so as to perform the operation again (loop) with the pattern of the character pattern data A or to maintain the non-operation state, It can be set arbitrarily on the feature presentation sequence or feature pattern data.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a bonus feature operating state information update process (S906). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays information indicating the operation state of the rotary combination product unit 122 in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (such as combination pattern data and an elapsed time from the instruction according to the instruction to the Store or overwrite the bonus feature operating state information.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a feature presentation interlock request process (S 907). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the character pattern data for which the character is instructed to the character control board 78 in S905 is interlocking character pattern data, and if it is interlocking character pattern data, The operation start request is added (entry) to the lamp state information, the sound reproduction state information, and the animation reproduction state information. Further, when the operation of the rotary combination 123 with the pattern of the interlocking pattern data ends, the sub CPU 102 appends (entry) the interlocking end request to the lamp state information, the sound reproduction state information, and the animation reproduction state information. The sub CPU 102 determines the end timing of the operation of the rotary combination 123 in the interlocked combination pattern data pattern based on counting of the number of rotations, an elapsed time from an operation instruction, and the like.
Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S901 after S907.

Lamp control task
Next, the lamp control task will be described with reference to FIG. The lamp control task is a task of controlling the output of light by light sources such as the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22.

  In S911 of the lamp control task, the sub CPU 102 takes out the lamp data registered in S517 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and shifts the processing to S912 (S911). If there is no registered lamp data, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S912.

  In S912, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is registered lamp data (S912). If it is determined that there is no lamp data registered in S912 (if S912 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S915.

  If it is determined that there is lamp data registered in S912 (if YES in S912), the sub CPU 102 acquires a lamp effect sequence from the lamp sequence table based on the extracted lamp data (S913). The lamp effect sequence is data indicating a pattern of effects concerning a light source such as the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 (data indicating lighting pattern, number of times of lighting, lighting time, brightness, color tone, etc., hereinafter may be referred to as lamp pattern data) It consists of). The lamp effect sequence may be constituted by a single lamp pattern data or may be constituted by a combination of a plurality of lamp pattern data. Among the lamp pattern data constituting the lamp effect sequence, there is one in which a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the lamp pattern data is set. As the start condition, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the rotation start of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation ON (ON edge), release of pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation OFF (OFF edge, reception of display command), payout. In addition, as for the lamp effect sequence, for each lamp pattern data constituting the lamp effect sequence, is the pattern data the pattern data (hereinafter referred to as interlocked lamp pattern data) related to the lamp product interlocking effect (see S919) described later? It is comprised including the data which shows whether or not. The lamp effect sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of lamp effect sequences, and associates lamp data with the lamp effect sequences. In the present embodiment, data relating to the reel lamp 22 in the lamp pattern data whose start condition is reception of a display command constituting a lamp effect sequence during a pseudo bonus indicates a pattern that blinks at a predetermined interval.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired lamp effect sequence as lamp effect sequence data to be referred to in the subsequent processing (S914).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a display command is received (S915). If it is determined in S915 that the display command has not been received (if the determination in S915 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S918.

  If it is determined in S915 that the display command has been received (if S915 is a YES determination), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the sub gaming state is a simulated bonus and the simulated bonus penalty flag is on (S916) ). Specifically, sub CPU 102 refers to the sub storage area (see FIG. 77), and one of “SBB flag”, “BB flag”, and “RB flag” is on, and the pseudo bonus penalty flag is on. It is determined whether or not In S916, when it is determined that the sub gaming state is not in the simulated bonus or the pseudo bonus penalty flag is not on (in the case of NO determination in S916), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S918.

  In S916, when it is determined that the sub gaming state is a simulated bonus and the simulated bonus penalty flag is on (if YES in S916), the lamp pattern data of the reel lamp 22 in the lamp effect sequence data set in S914. Is changed to the all lighting pattern (S917). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 is a pattern in which the data relating to the reel lamp 22 blinks at a predetermined interval among the lamp pattern data whose start condition is reception of the display command (third stop operation off) in the lamp effect sequence data. Rewrite all lighting pattern, that is, a pattern that lights without blinking.

  In S918, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the lamp state information (S918). The lamp state information is information indicating the state of the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 (lamp pattern data according to the instruction to the LED control board 72, elapsed time from the instruction, etc.), and stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 It is done. The operation start request and the operation end request are added (entered) in the lamp state information in the object rendering interlocking request process (S 907) of the object control task (see FIG. 120). In S918, when there is neither the operation start request nor the operation end request in the lamp state information (when S918 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S920.

  In S918, when there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the lamp state information (when the determination in S918 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a lamp combination product interlocking effect process (S919). In the lamp / role interlocking effect process, the sub CPU 102 instructs the LED control board 72 to synchronize the start timing and the end timing of the lamp effect by the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 etc. I do. For example, when the character pattern data A having the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocked character pattern, and the operation start request is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the character control task (see FIG. 120), If the lamp pattern data A which constitutes the lamp effect sequence data A set in S 914 and whose first stop operation is the start condition is the interlocked lamp pattern data, the lamp pattern data A causes the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 etc. Instructs the LED control board 72 to light up. When the operation end request related to the character pattern data A is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the character control task (see FIG. 120), the sub CPU 102 controls the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 according to the lamp pattern data A. The LED control board 72 is instructed to stop (terminate) the lighting of the LED. Even if the character pattern data A having the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocked character pattern and the operation start request is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the character control task (see FIG. 120), If the lamp pattern data B constituting the lamp effect sequence data B set in S914 and having the first stop operation as the start condition is not the interlocked lamp pattern data, the sub CPU 102 instructs the lamp pattern data B in S919. The process proceeds to step S920 without performing the process.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs lamp effect sequence data update processing (S920). In this process, whether the start condition of each lamp pattern data constituting the set lamp effect sequence data is correct or not is determined, and if it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 are determined by the pattern of the lamp pattern data. And instructs the LED control board 72 to light up. If the lamp pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied is interlocked lamp pattern data and the operation start request is not yet entered in the lamp state information, the sub CPU 102 performs lighting of the lamp pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied. Hold the instruction. In this case, at the timing when the process proceeds to S918 and S919 after the operation start request is entered in the lamp state information, the sub CPU 102 instructs lighting according to the held lamp pattern data. By this, it is possible to synchronize the effect relating to interlocking object pattern data, for example, the effect relating to the above-mentioned object pattern data A, and the effect relating to the interlocking lamp pattern data, such as the effect relating to the above lamp pattern data A it can.

  In addition, about the other point of a lamp presentation sequence data update process, since it is the same as that of the above-mentioned character article presentation sequence data update process (S905 of FIG. 120), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs lamp operation state information update processing (S921). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores or overwrites lamp state information. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S911.

[Sound control task]
Next, the sound control task will be described with reference to FIG. The sound control task is a task for controlling the output of sound from the speakers 20L and 20R.

  In S931 of the sound control task, the sub CPU 102 extracts the sound data registered in S516 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and shifts the processing to S932 (S931). If there is no registered sound data, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S 932.

  In S932, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is any registered sound data (S932). If it is determined that there is no sound data registered in S932 (if S932 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S935.

  If it is determined that there is sound data registered in S932 (if YES in S932), the sub CPU 102 acquires a sound effect sequence from the sound sequence table based on the extracted sound data (S933). The sound effect sequence is composed of data (wav file name, various parameters, data indicating sound volume, etc .; hereinafter sometimes referred to as sound pattern data) indicating a pattern of effects relating to the output of sound from the speakers 20L, 20R. The sound effect sequence may be composed of a single piece of sound pattern data or composed of a plurality of pieces of sound pattern data. The various parameters specify the corresponding channel number, the transfer rate per second of audio (kbps (kilo bits per second)), the presence or absence of loop reproduction, and the presence or absence of chain reproduction. Some sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence includes start conditions for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the sound pattern data. As the start condition, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the rotation start of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation ON (ON edge), release of pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation OFF (OFF edge, reception of display command), payout. Also, for the sound effect sequence, for each of the sound pattern data that make up the sound effect sequence, is the pattern data pattern data (hereinafter referred to as interlocked sound pattern data) related to sound effect linked effect (see S936) described later? It is comprised including the data which shows whether or not. The sound effect sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of sound effect sequences, and associates sound data with the sound effect sequences.

  In addition, in the sound effect sequence relating to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen, the sound reproduction state information described later is added every time a predetermined period elapses after the instruction relating to the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence is given. Marker data is defined. For example, the sound pattern data C constituting the sound effect sequence C related to the effect of displaying the bonus confirmation screen is a sound for outputting the wav file name “effect sound C” for a predetermined time, for example, 5 seconds with the start lever 16 operation as the start condition. It is a pattern. Further, in the sound effect sequence C, marker data 1 to 4 to be added to sound reproduction state information to be described later are defined every one second after the sub CPU 102 instructs the sound substrate 71 to output the effect sound C. ing.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired sound effect sequence as sound effect sequence data to be referred to in the subsequent processing (S934).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the sound reproduction state information (S935). The sound reproduction state information is information indicating the state of the output of the effect sound (sound pattern data according to the instruction to the sound substrate 71, an elapsed time from the instruction, etc.), and is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 . The operation start request and the operation end request are added (entry) to the sound reproduction state information in the object rendering interlocking request process (S 907) of the object control task (see FIG. 120). In S935, when there is neither operation start request nor operation end request in the sound reproduction state information (S935 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S937.

  In S935, when there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the sound reproduction state information (when the determination in S935 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a sound role interlocking effect process (S936). In the sound role interlocking effect processing, the sub CPU 102 controls the sound substrate 71 so that the start timing and the end timing of the character effect by outputting the effect sound from the speakers 20L and 20R and the character effect by the rotation character 123 are synchronized. Give instructions to For example, when the character pattern data A having the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking character pattern, and the operation start request is entered in the sound reproduction state information in S906 of the character control task (see FIG. 120). If the sound pattern data A that constitutes the sound effect sequence data A set in S934 and the first stop operation is the start condition is linked sound pattern data, the effect sound relating to the sound pattern data A is output to the speakers 20L, 20R. The sound board 71 is instructed to output from. Further, when the operation end request related to the character pattern data A is entered in the sound reproduction state information in S906 of the character control task (see FIG. 120), the sub CPU 102 outputs the effect sound related to the sound pattern data A It instructs the sound board 71 to cancel (terminate). Even if the character pattern data A having the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocked character pattern and the operation start request is entered in the lamp state information in S906 of the character control task (see FIG. 120), If the sound pattern data B for which the sound effect sequence data B set in S934 is set as the start condition of the first stop operation is not the linked sound pattern data, the sub CPU 102 instructs the sound pattern data B in S936. The process proceeds to step S937 without performing the process.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound effect sequence data update process (S937). In this process, whether the start condition of the sound pattern data making up the set sound effect sequence data is correct or not is judged, and if it is judged that the start condition is satisfied, the sound is output so that the effect sound is output with the pattern of the sound pattern data. The substrate 71 is instructed. If the sound pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied is linked sound pattern data, and the operation start request is not yet entered in the sound reproduction state information, the sub CPU 102 effects the sound pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied. Hold the sound output instruction. In this case, at the timing when the operation start request is entered in the sound reproduction state information and the processing shifts to S935 and S936, the sub CPU 102 instructs the output of the effect sound relating to the sound pattern data that has been suspended. By this, it is possible to synchronize the effect relating to interlocking character pattern data, for example, the effect relating to the above-mentioned character pattern data A, and the effect relating to the interlocking sound pattern data, such as the effect relating to the above sound pattern data A it can.

  In addition, about the other point of a sound production sequence data update process, since it is the same as that of the above-mentioned character article production sequence data update process (S905 of FIG. 120), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound reproduction state information update process (S938). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores or overwrites the sound reproduction state information. Further, in the case where the sound pattern data relating to the instruction to the sound substrate 71 in S936 is the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence relating to the effect of displaying the bonus finalized screen, the sub CPU 102 executes the sound every predetermined time. The marker data defined in the effect sequence is added to the sound reproduction state information. For example, in the case where the sound pattern data relating to the instruction to the sound substrate 71 is the sound pattern data C constituting the above-described sound effect sequence C, marker data 1 after 1 second has passed since the instruction relating to the sound pattern data C The marker data 2 is added after 2 seconds, the marker data 3 after 3 seconds, and the marker data 4 after 4 seconds, to the sound reproduction state information. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S931.

Animation Control Task
Next, the animation control task will be described with reference to FIG. The animation control task is a task for controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2).

  In S941 of the animation control task, the sub CPU 102 takes out the animation data registered in S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 101), and shifts the processing to S942 (S941). If there is no registered animation data, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S942.

  In S942, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is registered animation data (S942). If it is determined that there is no animation data registered in S942 (if S942 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S945.

  If it is determined that there is animation data registered in S942 (if S942 is a YES determination), the sub CPU 102 selects an animation effect sequence associated with the animation data extracted from the plurality of animation effect sequences constituting the animation sequence table. Is acquired (S943). The animation effect sequence is data indicating a pattern of effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2) (data indicating a moving image file name to be reproduced, reproduction time of moving image, etc., hereinafter referred to as animation pattern data) There are The animation presentation sequence may be composed of a single piece of animation pattern data or may be composed of a combination of a plurality of pieces of animation pattern data. Among animation pattern data that constitute an animation effect sequence, there is one in which a start condition for starting an effect of a pattern indicated by the animation pattern data is set. As the start condition, for example, the operation of the start lever 16, the rotation start of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation ON (ON edge), release of pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation, so-called third stop operation OFF (OFF edge, reception of display command), payout. In addition, with regard to animation pattern data constituting the animation effect sequence, the animation effect sequence is whether or not the pattern data is pattern data (hereinafter referred to as interlocked animation pattern data) related to animation role linked effect (see S946) described later. Is configured to include data indicating The animation presentation sequence table is a table composed of a plurality of animation presentation sequences, and associates animation data with the animation presentation sequence.

  In addition, the animation rendering sequence is configured to include data indicating whether or not it is a bonus determination rendering sequence which is an animation rendering sequence relating to a rendering for displaying a bonus determination screen (moving image). Further, the effect by the animation pattern data constituting the bonus determination effect sequence is performed by sequentially reproducing (displaying on the liquid crystal display device 11) a plurality of divided moving image data generated by dividing a series of moving image data. . For example, the effect by the animation pattern data A constituting the animation effect sequence C, which is a bonus determination effect sequence, is, for example, divided video data 0 to 4 generated by dividing 5 seconds of moving image data into 5 for 1 second. It is configured. The subsequent divided moving image data subsequent to the first divided moving image data, that is, divided moving image data 1 to 4 subsequent to the divided moving image data 0 in the above example, is associated with different marker data to be described later. The reproduction of the divided moving image data 1 to 4 will be described in detail in the description of S950 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the acquired animation rendering sequence as animation rendering sequence data to be referred to in the subsequent processing (S944).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the animation reproduction state information (S945). The animation reproduction state information is information indicating the state of video display (animation pattern data relating to an instruction to the liquid crystal display device 11, an elapsed time from the instruction, etc.), and is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. The operation start request and the operation end request are additionally (entry) in the animation reproduction state information in the object rendering interlocking request process (S 907) of the object control task (see FIG. 120). In S945, when neither of the operation start request and the operation end request is present in the animation reproduction state information (when S945 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S947.

  In S945, when there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the animation reproduction state information (when the determination in S945 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an animation role interlocking effect processing (S946). In the animation role interlocking effect processing, the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to synchronize the start timing and the end timing of the animation effect by displaying the image on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the character effect rendering by the rotating role object 123. Give instructions to For example, if the character pattern data A having the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocked character pattern, and the operation start request is entered in the animation reproduction state information in S906 of the character control task (see FIG. 120) If the animation pattern data B for which animation presentation sequence data A set in S944 is set as the start condition and the first stop operation is the start condition is linked animation pattern data, the image related to the animation pattern data B is displayed. The liquid crystal display device 11 is instructed. Further, when the operation end request related to the character pattern data A is entered in the animation reproduction state information in S906 of the character control task (see FIG. 120), the sub CPU 102 cancels the display of the image related to the animation pattern data B The liquid crystal display device 11 is instructed to (end). Also, when the character pattern data A having the first stop operation as the start condition is the interlocking character pattern, and the operation start request is entered in the animation reproduction state information in S906 of the character control task (see FIG. 120). If the animation pattern data D having the first stop operation as the start condition is not the linked animation pattern data, the sub CPU 102 processes the animation pattern data D in the process of S946. The process proceeds to S947 without giving an instruction related to.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the animation effect sequence data set in S944 is a bonus effect effect sequence which is an animation effect sequence relating to an effect for displaying a bonus decision screen (moving image) (S947). If it is determined in S947 that the bonus determination effect sequence is not performed (S947 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S951.

  When it is determined in S947 that the bonus determination effect sequence is determined (S947 is YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires sound reproduction state information stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S948).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is marker data in the sound reproduction state information (S949). If it is determined that there is no marker data (S949: NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S951.

  If it is determined in S949 that there is marker data (if S949 is a YES determination), the sub CPU 102 performs bonus determination effect processing (S950). In this process, the sub CPU 102 reproduces (displays on the liquid crystal display device 11) any one of the divided moving image data subsequent to the first divided moving image data related to the bonus determination effect sequence. Each subsequent divided moving image data is associated with a different marker data, and when there is marker data in the sound reproduction state information acquired in S948, the sub CPU 102 reproduces the subsequent divided moving image data corresponding to the marker data. . For example, the divided moving image data 1 reproduced by the animation pattern data A constituting the above-mentioned animation effect sequence C is associated with the marker data 1 related to the sound pattern data C constituting the above-mentioned sound effect sequence C. Similarly, the divided moving image data 2 is associated with the marker data 2, the divided moving image data 3 is associated with the marker data 3, and the divided moving image data 4 is associated with the marker data 4. When the marker data 1 is included in the sound reproduction state information, the sub CPU 102 starts the reproduction of the divided moving image data 1 when the divided moving image data 1 is not being reproduced. Further, in the same case, when the divided moving image data 1 is being reproduced, the reproduction of the divided moving image data 1 is continued. Similarly, when any of the marker data 2 to 4 is included in the sound reproduction state information, the sub CPU 102 starts reproduction of any one of the divided moving image data 2 to 4 associated therewith. By this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the synchronization deviation in which the display of the moving image related to the effect for displaying the bonus determination screen (moving image) and the output of the effect sound are deviated. Note that the first display instruction of divided moving image data (for example, the above-mentioned divided moving image data 0) is performed in S 951 described later, or in S 946 when animation pattern data of a bonus determination effect sequence is linked animation pattern data. .

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs animation effect sequence data update processing (S951). In this process, it is determined whether the start condition of the animation pattern data making up the set animation rendering sequence data is correct or not, and when it is determined that the start condition is met, the liquid crystal display device displays the moving image according to the animation pattern data. Indicate 11 If the animation pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied is linked animation pattern data, and the operation start request is not yet entered in the animation reproduction state information, the sub CPU 102 instructs the animation pattern data for which the start condition is satisfied. Hold the In this case, the sub CPU 102 issues an instruction relating to the animation pattern data that has been suspended at the timing when the process proceeds to S945 and S946 after the operation start request is entered in the animation reproduction state information. By this, synchronization between the effect relating to interlocking character object pattern data, for example, the effect relating to the above-mentioned character object pattern data A, and the effect relating to the interlocking animation pattern data, such as the effect relating to the above-mentioned animation pattern data B it can.

  In addition, about the other point of animation production sequence data update processing, since it is the same as that of the above-mentioned character article production sequence data update processing (S905 of FIG. 120), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs animation reproduction state information update processing (S952). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores or overwrites the animation reproduction state information. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S941.

[Touch panel control task]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the touch panel control task will be described. The touch panel control task is a task for managing the touch input unit 31 a and is performed by the sub CPU 102.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is received data (S961). Here, the reception data is transmitted from the touch sensor relay substrate 73 (see FIG. 7) at a predetermined cycle, in this embodiment every 200 msec, and received by the sub control substrate 42 via the sub relay substrate 67 (FIG. 7). Data. The commands included in the received data include a touch operation command, a flick operation command, a reset notification command, and an operation confirmation command.

  The touch operation command is a command included in the reception data received from the touch sensor relay substrate 73 when the touch operation is performed. Here, the touch operation is an operation of touching a finger on the surface of the touch input unit 31a. The received data including the touch operation command also includes coordinate information related to the performed touch operation.

  Further, the flick operation command is a command included in the reception data received from the touch sensor relay board 73 when the flick operation is performed. Here, the flick operation is an operation to quickly flip the surface of the touch input unit 31a with a finger, that is, an operation to move the finger for a predetermined distance or more in a short time while the finger is in contact with the surface. The received data including the flick operation command also includes coordinate information related to the performed flick operation.

  In addition, for example, when a communication error between the touch sensor relay substrate 73 and the touch input unit 31 a occurs and the touch sensor relay substrate 73 resets itself and the touch input unit 31 a, the reset notification command may be a touch sensor relay This is a command included in received data received from the substrate 73.

In addition, the operation check command is received from the touch sensor relay substrate 73 when the touch sensor relay substrate 73 receives no input signal from the touch input unit 31a, that is, when no operation is performed on the touch input unit 31a. Command included in received data.
When a failure occurs in the touch sensor relay substrate 73 or the touch input unit 31a, the received data received from the touch sensor relay substrate 73 may include an error code indicating the generated failure.

  If it is determined in S961 that there is no received data (S961 is NO), the sub CPU 102 repeats the process of S961.

  If it is determined in S961 that there is received data (YES in S961), it is determined whether the received data is normal (the received data does not include an error code) (S962). If it is determined in S962 that the received data is not normal (if the determination in S962 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs an error history registration process (S963). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 records an error code “TP COM ERR” in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S961.

  The error code recorded in the predetermined area of the sub RAM is the error information history screen (see FIG. 130) displayed on the main screen 111 in the error information history process (S1009) in the hall menu process (see FIG. 129) described later. It is possible to refer.

  If it is determined in S962 that the received data is normal (if YES in S962), the sub CPU 102 performs touch panel input editing processing (S964). In the touch panel input editing process, when data transmitted from the touch sensor relay substrate 73 includes a touch operation command or a flick operation command continuously a predetermined number of times, such as 288,000 times in this embodiment, registration of an error history, etc. Processing. Details of the touch panel input editing process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the touch panel input editing process, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to S961.

[Touch panel input editing process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the touch panel input editing process of S964 in the touch panel control task (see FIG. 124) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether a command included in received data, that is, a received command (CMD) is an operation confirmation command (S971). If it is determined in S971 that the command is an operation confirmation command (if S971 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets 0 to the operation command continuous count stored in the sub RAM 103 (S972). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S982.

  If it is determined in S971 that the received command is not an operation confirmation command (if NO in S971), it is determined whether the received command is a touch operation command (S973).

  If it is determined in S973 that the touch operation command is received (if YES in S973), the sub CPU 102 stores touch operation XY coordinate data, which is coordinate information in received data, in the touch operation buffer of the sub RAM 103 (S974).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the operation command continuous counter (S975). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S982.

  If it is determined in S973 that the received command is not a touch operation command (if NO in S973), it is determined whether the received command is a flick operation command (S976).

  If it is determined in S976 that the command is a flick operation command (if YES in S976), the sub CPU 102 stores flick operation XY coordinate data, which is coordinate information in received data, in the touch operation buffer of the sub RAM 103 (S977).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the operation command continuous counter (S978). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S982.

  If it is determined in S976 that the command is not a flick operation command (S976 is NO), it is determined whether the received command is a reset notification command (S979).

  If it is determined in S979 that the command is not a reset notification command (if S979 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S982.

  If it is determined in S979 that the command is a reset notification command (if YES in S979), the sub CPU 102 performs an error history registration process (S980). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 records an error code “TP RST ??” in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets 0 in the operation command continuous counter (S981). Then, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S982.

  In S982, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the operation command continuous counter stored in the sub RAM 103 exceeds 72000 (S982). When it is determined that the operation command continuous counter does not exceed 72000 (when the determination in S982 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the touch panel input editing process.

  If it is determined in S982 that the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000 (YES in S982), the sub CPU 102 records an error code "TP LONG ON" in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S983). Then, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to the touch panel control task (see FIG. 124).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000 in S982 (when the determination in S982 is YES), the sub CPU 102 displays a warning screen (see FIG. 126) on the main screen 111 for three minutes.

  The case where the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000 means that the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay substrate 73 includes the touch operation command or the flick operation command continuously 72000 times. That is, since the touch sensor relay substrate 73 transmits data every 200 msec, in the above case, the touch operation command or the flick operation command is included in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay substrate 73 for 4 hours. It will be the case. However, normally, no touch operation or flick operation is performed for four hours. Therefore, when the operation command continuous counter exceeds 72000, some trouble occurs in the touch sensor relay substrate 73 or the touch input unit 31a, or a part or possession of the player's body in the touch input unit 31a. It is conceivable that the state in which the objects are in contact continues. Therefore, as described above, the sub CPU 102 records an error code "TP LONG ON" in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103 (S983). Further, the sub CPU 102 displays a warning screen (see FIG. 126) on the main screen 111 for three minutes.

  In addition, the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the screen displayed before the warning screen is displayed after three minutes after displaying the warning screen on the main screen 111, and enables resumption of the game. In addition, if the condition for setting 0 to the operation command continuous counter is satisfied within 3 minutes after the warning screen is displayed, that is, if the sub CPU 102 receives an operation confirmation command or receives a reset notification command, a warning is issued. The display of the screen is stopped, and the screen displayed before the display of the warning screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 to enable resumption of the game.

[Hall menu task]
Next, the hall menu task will be described with reference to FIG. The hall menu task is a task for controlling the hall menu. The hall menu task is performed by the sub CPU 102 every predetermined period, in this embodiment, every 33 msec.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the setting key is turned on from off (S991). In this process, when the sub CPU 102 receives a setting change start command transmitted from the main CPU 93 by operating the setting key type switch 52, the sub CPU 102 determines that the setting key is turned on from off.

  When it is determined in S991 that the setting key is not turned on from the off state (when the determination in S991 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S991 again. That is, the sub CPU 102 repeats the process of S991 until determining that the setting key is turned on from off.

  When it is determined in S991 that the setting key is turned on from the off state (when the determination in S991 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs hall menu display processing for displaying the hall menu screen shown in FIG. 128 on the main screen 111 (S992 ). As shown in FIG. 128, the sub CPU 102 arranges a hall menu item area for displaying selectable hall menu items on the left side of the hall menu screen. Further, the sub CPU 102 arranges, below the hall menu item area, an operation explanation area for displaying an operation method at the time of displaying the hall menu screen.

  In order to confirm various information and settings and change various settings, the operator operates the select button 29 and the enter button 28 (see FIG. 2) while the hall menu screen is displayed on the main screen 111. Of the hall menus displayed on the hall menu screen, one hall menu is selected. The sub CPU 102 indicates that the position of the highlight display for designating one hall menu is to be changed by the select button 29 (menu selection) in the operation explanation area as the operation explanation. The sub CPU 102 also uses the enter menu as a target hole menu for performing confirmation of various information and settings, changing of various settings, deletion of various information, and the like from the highlighted hall menu as the operation explanation in the operation explanation area. At 28 is shown to select (determine).

  In addition, the sub CPU 102 is a menu item area of the hall menu screen, which is a hall menu selectable on the hall menu screen [Time setting], [total medal information], [setting change / confirmation history], [error information history] , [Monitoring history], [Warning display setting], [Informing setting], [Power saving mode], [Maintenance], [Apart operation check], [Liquid crystal brightness setting processing], [Volume adjustment setting], 6 The items ([Time setting], [Total medal information], [Setting change / confirmation history], [Error information history], [Monitoring history], [Warning display setting]) are displayed in the form of rectangular buttons. In addition, the sub CPU 102 displays a button-like hall menu to be displayed in the hall menu item area, [time setting], [total medal information], [setting change / confirmation history], [error information history], [monitoring history], Arrange in the order of [Warning display settings] vertically and display.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 highlights and displays [time setting], which is the hall menu located at the top, on the hall menu screen at this time. Further, when the select button 29 is pressed, the sub CPU 102 changes the hall menu to be highlighted and displayed from [time setting] to [total medal information] located below it. Similarly, every time the select button 29 is pressed, the sub CPU 102 changes the hall menu to be highlighted, and at this time, [Warning display setting], which is the hall menu located at the lowermost position, is highlighted. When the select button 29 is pressed, a rectangular button-like hole menu item to be displayed in the menu item area is displayed as [Informative setting], [Power saving mode], [Maintenance], [Check for item operation], [Liquid crystal Change to 7 items of [brightness setting processing] and [volume adjustment setting]. In addition, the sub CPU 102 displays a button-shaped hall menu displayed in the hall menu item area, [inform setting], [power saving mode], [maintenance], [subject operation check], [liquid crystal luminance setting processing], Arrange in the order of the volume adjustment setting] and display in the vertical direction.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 highlights the "notification setting" which is the hall menu located on the top after changing the display of the menu item area, and lowers the hall menu which is highlighted each time the select button 29 is pressed. Change to the hall menu located at. The sub CPU 102 changes the display of the menu item area to the menu item area when the select button 29 is pressed while the [volume adjustment setting], which is the hall menu located at the lowermost position, is highlighted after being changed. Change the hole menu item to be displayed to [Time setting], [Total medal information], [Setting change / confirmation history], [Error information history], [Monitoring history], and [Warning display setting] (return to before change) .

  After the hall menu display process of S992 shown in FIG. 127, the sub CPU 102 performs a hall menu process (S993). Hall menu processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the setting key is turned off (S994). In this process, when the sub CPU 102 receives a setting change end command transmitted from the main CPU 93 by operating the setting key type switch 52, the sub CPU 102 determines that the setting key is turned off.

  When it is determined in S994 that the setting key is not turned off from on (when the determination in S994 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S993.

  When it is determined in S994 that the setting key is turned off from on (when S994 is determined as YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the setting change has been performed in the hall menu process (S993) (S995) .

  When it is determined in S995 that the setting change has been performed (when the determination in S995 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a setting change initialization process (S996), and moves the process to S997. On the other hand, when it is determined in S995 that the setting change has not been performed (NO in S995), the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S997.

  In S997, the sub CPU 102 performs game screen return display processing (S997). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays, on the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113, an image for effect displayed when playing a game and an initial image displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period. Then, after the processing of S997, the sub CPU 102 shifts the processing to S991.

[Hall menu processing]
Next, hall menu processing (S993) in the hall menu task (see FIG. 127) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 performs hall menu selection processing for selecting a hall menu which is a target for checking various information and settings and changing various settings based on the operation of the select button 29 and the enter button 28 by the operator (S1001). ).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in S1001 is [time setting] (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the selected hall menu is [time setting] (if S1002 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs time setting processing (S1003). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a time setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables confirmation and change of the time set by the operator.

  If it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [Time setting] (if S1002 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the hall menu selected in S1001 is [total medal information] (S1004) . If it is determined that the selected hall menu is [total medal information] (if S1004 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs total medal information processing (S1005). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a total medal information screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm the total medal information.

  If it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [total medal information] (if S1004 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the hall menu selected in S1001 is [setting change / confirmation] ( S1006). If it is determined that the selected hall menu is [setting change / confirmation] (if S1006 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs setting change / confirmation processing (S1007). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a setting change / confirmation screen (not shown) on the main screen 111 to enable the operator to confirm and change the setting.

  If it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [setting change / confirmation] (if S1006 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the hall menu selected in S1001 is [error information history] ( S1008). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is [error information history] (if S1008 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs error information history processing (S1009). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays an error information history screen shown in FIG. 130 on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm or change the error information history.

  As shown in FIG. 130, an error information history table is disposed substantially at the center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content sequence in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date and time sequence in which a date and time at which the error code is recorded is displayed, and a release date and time sequence in which a date and time when the error is canceled. In the lower left portion of the error information history screen, an operation method on the error information history screen is displayed. For example, a cursor (not shown) for designating an arbitrary line on the error information history screen is moved by pressing the select button 29 ("move of cursor"), and simultaneously pressing the select button 29 and the enter button 28. To delete the error code etc. displayed on the line specified by the cursor ("clear data"), and by pressing the enter button 28, the display of the error information history screen is ended ("return") The message is displayed.

  If it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [error information history] (if S1008 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the hall menu selected in S1001 is [monitoring history] (S1010) . If it is determined that the selected hall menu is [monitoring history] (if S1010 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs monitoring history processing (S1011). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) on the main screen 111 to enable the operator to confirm the monitoring history.

  If it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [monitoring history] (if S1010 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the hall menu selected in S1001 is [warning display setting] (S1012) . If it is determined that the selected hall menu is [warning display setting] (if S1012 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a warning display setting process (S1013). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm and change the warning display setting.

  If it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [warning display setting] (if S1012 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the hall menu selected in S1001 is [notification setting] (S1014) . If it is determined that the selected hall menu is "notification setting" (if S1014 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a notification setting process (S1015). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm and change the notification setting.

  If it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [notify setting] (if S1014 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the hall menu selected in S1001 is [power saving mode] (S1016) . When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the “power saving mode” (when the determination in step S1016 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs power saving mode processing (step S1017). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm and change the setting of the power saving mode.

  If it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not the [power saving mode] (if S1016 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the hall menu selected in S1001 is [maintenance] (S1018). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is [maintenance] (when S1018 is determined as YES), the sub CPU 102 performs maintenance processing (S1019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [maintenance] (if S1018 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the hall menu selected in S1001 is [subject operation check] (S1020) . If it is determined that the selected hall menu is [subject operation check] (if S1020 is a YES determination), the sub CPU 102 performs a prize operation check process (S1021). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a bonus item operation confirmation screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to check the bonus item operation.

  If it is determined that the hole menu selected in S1001 is not [subject operation check] (if S1020 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the hole menu selected in S1001 is [liquid crystal brightness setting] ( S1022). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is [liquid crystal luminance setting] (if S1022 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs liquid crystal luminance setting processing (S1023). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a liquid crystal brightness setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm and change the setting of the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 11.

  If it is determined that the hall menu selected in S1001 is not [liquid crystal brightness setting] (if S1022 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the hall menu selected in S1001 is [volume adjustment setting] (S1024 ). If it is determined that the selected hall menu is [volume adjustment setting] (if S1024 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs volume adjustment setting processing (S1025). In this process, the sub CPU 102 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the main screen 111, and enables the operator to confirm and change the setting of the volume of the sound output from the speakers 20L and 20R.

  After processing of S1003, s1005, S1007, S1009, S1011, S1013, S1015, S1019, S1019, S1021, S1023, and S1025, and when it is determined that the Hall menu selected in S1001 is not [volume adjustment setting] (S1024 is NO determination ), The sub CPU 102 ends the hall menu process, and returns the process to S994 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 127).

Maintenance processing
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the maintenance process (S1019) in the hall menu process (see FIG. 129) will be described. In the maintenance process, the sub CPU 102 displays the maintenance screen 114 and the touch panel maintenance screen 115 shown in FIG. 132 on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the MAX bet button 24, 1 BET button 25, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, enter button 28, Various operation devices to be operated by the player such as the select button 29, various internal devices disposed inside the pachi slot 1 such as the hopper device 43 and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and various sensors such as sensors provided in the selector 46 Also, the operator can be made to confirm whether various peripheral devices such as the touch input unit 31a operate normally. In the following description, various operating devices, various internal devices, various sensors, and various peripheral devices other than the touch input unit 31a may be collectively referred to as various devices.

  As shown in FIG. 132, the sub CPU 102 displays the maintenance screen 114 above the partition 112 on the main screen 111. In addition, the sub CPU 102 displays the operating states of various devices on the maintenance screen 114. Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the touch panel maintenance screen 115 across the sub screen 113 and the lower part of the partition in the main screen 111.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 displays an operation state display table shown in FIG. 133 substantially at the center of the maintenance screen 114. The operation status display table includes a name column in which names of 23 various devices are displayed, and a number column in which serial numbers (1 to 23) assigned to various devices displayed in the name column are displayed; And an operation state sequence indicating operation states of various devices. The "OFF" display of the operation state column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is an input from various devices, the display of the operation state column is changed from the "OFF" display to the "ON" display. For example, when the MAX bet button 14 is pressed while the maintenance screen 114 is displayed, the sub CPU 102 changes the display of the operation state row of the MAX bet button 14 from “OFF” display to “ON” display. In addition, "ON" display is displayed in red.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 displays an operation method at the time of displaying the maintenance screen 114 at the lower left of the maintenance screen 114. Specifically, when the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are simultaneously pressed, the effect of returning to the hall menu screen (FIG. 128) (redisplayed) is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 132, the sub CPU 102 displays, on the touch panel maintenance screen 115, a vertical line and a cross-shaped grid line G formed of a horizontal line orthogonal to the vertical line. When the display of touch panel maintenance screen 115 is started, sub CPU 102 sets grid line G to sub screen 113 at the intersection of a vertical line and a horizontal line forming grid line G (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the intersection of grid line G). Displayed to be placed at the initial position set to the upper right of. Also, when the finger touches the touch input unit 31a, as shown in FIG. 134, the sub CPU 102 arranges the intersection of the grid line G at the position where the finger touches the touch input unit 31a. Change to That is, the sub CPU 102 changes the display position of the grid line G so that the intersection of the grid line G is disposed at the position corresponding to the position where the finger touches the touch input unit 31 a in the sub screen 113. When the finger moves while maintaining the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 is disposed at a position where the intersection of the grid lines G always corresponds to the position where the finger is touching the touch input unit 31a. Thus, the display position of the grid line G is changed in synchronization with the movement of the finger.

  Further, when the display position of the grid line G is changed and then the finger is separated from the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 displays the display position of the grid line G so that the intersection of the grid line G is disposed at the above-described initial position. change.

  In the maintenance process (see FIG. 131), first, the sub CPU 102 acquires non-operation command data from the main CPU 93 (S1031). The no-operation command here is a main input indicating whether there is an input from the various devices to which serial numbers 1 to 18 in the operation state display table shown in FIG. The status information is included and transmitted from the main CPU 93 every 4 msec.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs main input state information editing processing for reading out main input state information in the acquired no-operation command data (S1032).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires sub device input information (S1033). The sub device input information is information transmitted from the various devices and the touch input unit 31a to which serial numbers 19 to 23 of the operation state display table shown in FIG. 133 are attached, at predetermined intervals. The sub-device input information includes sub-input status information indicating whether the above-mentioned various devices are in the on state where there is an input or in the off state where there is no input. In addition, the sub input state information in the sub device input information transmitted from the touch input unit 31a includes the position where the finger is touching the touch input unit 31a (X and Y coordinates in the case of 0 and 0 of the initial position). It is done.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs sub input state information editing processing to read out the sub input state information in the acquired sub device input information (S1034).

  Next, based on the main input state information read out in S1032 and the sub input state information read out in S1034, the sub CPU 102 sets the maintenance screen 114 (see FIGS. 132 and 133) above the partition 112 in the main screen 111. A maintenance screen display process to be displayed on the screen is performed (S1035). In this process, the display of the maintenance screen 114 and the update of the display (for example, the change from the “OFF” display to the “ON” display) is performed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs touch panel maintenance screen display processing for displaying the touch panel maintenance screen 115 on the sub screen 113 based on the sub input information read in S1034 (S1036). In this process, display and update of the touch panel maintenance screen 115 (for example, change of the display position of the grid line G) are performed.

  Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are simultaneously operated (S1037). When it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are simultaneously operated (when the determination in S1037 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the maintenance processing and the hall menu processing (see the drawing), and performs the processing as the hall menu task (FIG. Return to S994 of 127).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the select button 29 and the enter button 28 are not simultaneously operated (when the determination in S1037 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S1031.

[OFF edge execution when button of touch input unit is selected]
In the present embodiment, when the operator selects an item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 using the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 executes the OFF edge. The OFF edge execution is to detect the selection of the item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the sub CPU 102 releases the finger from the touch input unit 31 a. In the present embodiment, detection of selection of an item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the sub CPU 102 touches the touch input unit 31a is referred to as ON edge execution.
The portable terminal cooperation function of the pachislot 1 will be described below as an example with reference to FIGS. 135 to 141.

  The portable terminal cooperation function of the pachislot 1 is a function for linking the pachislot 1 and the portable terminal. Using the portable terminal cooperation function of pachislot 1 to record detailed information on the game played by the player, or customizing a function that does not affect the game result of pachislot 1 by satisfying a predetermined condition Can.

  As the predetermined condition, for example, it can be mentioned that a specific small winning combination (internal winning combination) is determined in succession, or that a specific effect has been executed. In addition, to customize the function that does not affect the game result of Pachislot 1, for example, the music output during the first ART (simulated bonus) or the second ART (ART) is converted to a special song. Changing or changing the costume of the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 may be mentioned.

  When using the portable terminal cooperation function, first, the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111. When a pressing operation is performed on the enter button 28 or the select button 29 in a state where the unit game is ended, a guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111.

FIG. 135 shows a state in which the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111.
The guide initial image includes the characters "Unimeo (registered trademark)" and the characters "Please choose your favorite menu".

  As shown in FIG. 135, when the guide initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, a guide menu screen is displayed on the sub screen 113. A plurality of guide menus are displayed on the guide menu screen. The items of the guide menu include “start uni-memo”, “sequence / payout”, “model site”, and “return to game”. Each guide menu is displayed in the form of a rectangular button in which the character string of the item name is arranged at the center.

  When “Start Uni-memo” in the guide menu is selected, the uni-memo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 138). Further, when “sequence / payout” is selected, a sequence / payout initial image is displayed on the main screen 111 (not shown). Then, when “model site” is selected, a model site registration code is displayed on the main screen 111.

  When "return to game" is selected, the display of the guide initial image of the main screen 111 and the display of the guide menu of the sub screen 113 are ended. Then, on the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113, an image for effect displayed when playing a game, and an initial image displayed when the pachislot 1 is not operated for a predetermined period are displayed. In addition, even when a predetermined time has elapsed without touching any of the items of the guide menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113 have predetermined video for presentation and pachislot 1 to be displayed when playing a game. The initial image to be displayed when not operated for a period is displayed.

  When the guide menu screen is displayed, the sub CPU 102 performs OFF edge execution that detects that each guide menu has been selected by the player when the finger touching the touch input unit 31a is separated from the touch input unit 31a. . Further, the sub CPU 102 displays the guide menu displayed at the position on the sub screen 113 corresponding to the position touched by the player's finger on the touch input unit 31 a so as to be distinguishable from the buttons of the other guide menus. . In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 performs highlight display in which the button of the target guide menu is lighted in a distinguishable manner from the buttons of the other guide menus. Note that instead of the highlight display, the button of the target guide menu may be enlarged and displayed so as to be distinguishable from the buttons of the other guide menus.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 136, the position corresponding to the position where the player has displayed “array / payout” in the guide menu of the sub screen 113 in the touch input unit 31 a (in this embodiment, the guide menu “array When a finger is touched at a position facing in the front-rear direction to “payout”, the sub CPU 102 highlights and displays “arrangement / payout” in the guide menu. In this state, when the player releases his finger from the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 detects that the player has selected "array / payout" in the guide menu.

A position corresponding to the position at which the “array / payout” of the guide menu is displayed without the player removing the finger from the touch input section 31 a while the “array / payout” of the guide menu is highlighted. When the finger is moved to the outside, the sub CPU 102 ends the highlight display of “array / payout” in the guide menu. In this case, the sub CPU 102 does not detect that the player has selected “array / payout” in the guide menu. Then, as shown in FIG. 137, when the player moves the finger to a position corresponding to the position where “Start Uni-memo” in the guide menu is displayed, the sub CPU 102 starts “Uni-memo” in the guide menu. Highlight. Then, in this state, when the player releases the finger from the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 detects that the player has selected "Start uni-memo" in the guide menu.
That is, if the player does not release the finger from the touch input unit 31a, the sub screen 113 is displayed at a position corresponding to the outside of the position where the touch input unit 31a is first touched (opposite in the front and rear direction in this embodiment) You can select the guided menu.

  A specific operation of the sub CPU 102 when the above-described guide menu screen is displayed on the sub screen 113 will be described. First, the sub CPU 102 detects that the player touches the touch input unit 31 a with a finger, and detects position coordinates (the above-mentioned operation XY coordinate data) of the position at which the player's finger is touched. Next, the sub CPU 102 displays a guide menu at a position on the sub screen 113 corresponding to the detected position coordinate (in the present embodiment, a position facing the player's finger in the front-rear direction at the position touched). If it is, highlight the button on that guide menu. Further, the sub CPU 102 acquires position coordinates of the position where the player's finger is touched at a predetermined cycle, which is 50 msec in the present embodiment. When the sub CPU 102 detects that the player's finger has left the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 determines the position coordinates acquired last as selected coordinates, and guides the menu to a position corresponding to the selected coordinates on the sub screen 113. Is displayed, it detects that the guide menu has been selected by the player.

FIG. 138 shows a state in which the uninote initial image is displayed on the main screen 111.
The uni-memo initial image includes the letters "uni-memo" and "let's customize favorite character".

  As shown in FIG. 138, when the unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, the unimemo menu screen is displayed on the sub screen 113. A plurality of uni memo menus are displayed on the uni memo menu screen. The items in the uni-memo menu include "enter password", "record", "record and exit", "member registration", "return to game", and "return". Each uni-memo menu is displayed in the form of a rectangular button in which the character string of the item name is arranged at the center. When the uni-memo menu screen is displayed, the sub CPU 102 selects that each uni-memo menu is selected by the player, as described above, when the finger touching the touch input unit 31a is released from the touch input unit 31a. To detect.

  When “enter password” is selected, a password display image is displayed on the main screen 111 (see FIG. 139).

FIG. 139 shows a state in which the password display image is displayed on the main screen 111.
The password display image includes the characters "Please enter password".

  As shown in FIG. 139, when the password display image is displayed on the main screen 111, the password input menu screen is displayed on the sub screen 113. A plurality of password entry menus are displayed on the password entry menu screen. The items of the password input menu include “decision”, “deletion”, “0” to “9”, “A” to “F”, “return to game”, and “return”. Each password entry menu is displayed in the form of a rectangular button in which the character string of the item name is arranged at the center.

  When “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” are selected in the password input menu, the selected character is input and displayed on the password display image. When "decision" of the password input menu is selected, a plurality of characters displayed in the password display image are determined as the password to be input. Then, when "delete" in the password input menu is selected, the last character input is deleted from the password display image.

  When "Return to game" of the password input menu is selected, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113 display images for effects to be displayed when playing a game, or when the pachislot 1 has not been operated for a predetermined period of time The initial image is displayed. In addition, even when a predetermined time has passed without selecting any of the items of the password input menu, the main screen 111 and the sub screen 113 have predetermined video for presentation and pachislot 1 to be displayed when playing a game. The initial image to be displayed when not operated for a period is displayed. In addition, when “return” of the password input menu is selected, the unimemo initial image is displayed on the main screen 111, and the unimemo menu is displayed on the sub screen 113 (see FIG. 138).

  When the password input menu screen is displayed, the sub CPU 102 detects that each password menu is selected by the player, as described above, when the finger touching the touch input unit 31a is separated from the touch input unit 31a. Do. For example, as shown in FIG. 139, when the player touches the touch input unit 31a at a position corresponding to the position where “E” of the password input menu is displayed (opposite in the front and rear direction), the sub The CPU 102 highlights “E” in the password input menu. Then, as shown in FIG. 140, when the player moves the finger to a position corresponding to the position where “F” of the password input menu is displayed on the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 inputs the password. End highlighting of the menu "E" and highlight "F" on the password entry menu. In this case, the sub CPU 102 does not detect that the player has selected “E” in the password input menu. In addition, when the player releases the finger from the touch input unit 31a while the password input menu “F” is highlighted, the sub CPU 102 selects the password input menu “F” by the player. To detect that. Then, as shown in FIG. 141, the sub CPU 102 displays “F” relating to the detection of selection in the password display image.

[First action]
In the present embodiment, a pullback is performed in the ART pullback process by performing the above-described during-ART process (see FIG. 105), ART pullback process (FIG. 107) and display command reception process (see FIG. 116). After that, in a game to be performed until a predetermined winning number notified of the stop order is won, the sub control circuit 101 sub-operation is performed as long as the stop operation is performed by the forward press (“left middle right” and “right and left middle”). The CPU 102 does not subtract the value of the ART game number counter (see S614 in FIG. 107, S808 in FIG. 116, and S584 and S585 in FIG. 105). Note that, even in the case of a game in which the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted, the sub CPU 102 performs lottery of the number of added games (S583 in ART during processing shown in FIG. 105) every game.
In addition, after the withdrawal in the ART withdrawal process, in the game which is performed until the predetermined winning number notified of the stop order is won (hereinafter, may be referred to as navigation between), other than forward push If the stop operation is performed in the stop order of, the value of the ART game number counter is decremented by 1 from the next game of the game for which the stop operation was performed in the stop order other than the forward press (see FIG. S614 in S107, S808 in FIG. 116, and S584 and S585 in FIG.

  Therefore, when the stop operation is not performed by pressing in order during navigation, the value of the ART game number counter becomes “0” earlier as compared to the case of performing the stop operation by pressing in order. Therefore, the number of times of additional game number lottery is reduced. That is, when the stop operation is not performed in the predetermined stop order during the navigation, the opportunity for the number of added games to be added to the ART game number counter is reduced compared to the case where the stop operation is performed in the predetermined stop order. it can. Therefore, when the stop operation is not performed in the predetermined stop order during navigation, a penalty can be generated.

  Also, regardless of not performing the stop operation in the predetermined stop order during the navigation, "50" is set in the ART game number counter (see S612 in FIG. 107). That is, the number of stay games of the second ART is guaranteed at least "50". Therefore, there is no excessive penalty for a player who has unintentionally stopped in an order of stopping different from the order of pushing. For this reason, it can control that the interest of a game falls.

  In the present embodiment, in the game performed during the navigation, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward press, from the next game of the game in which the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward press The manner in which the value of the ART game number counter is decremented by one for each game has been described. However, instead of this, the value of the ART game number counter may be decremented by “1” for each game from the game in which the stop operation is performed in the stop order other than the forward press. In this case, between S809 and S810 in the display command reception process (see FIG. 116), a process for subtracting “1” in the value of the ART game number counter similar to S585 in the in-ART process (see FIG. 105) is added .

[Second Action]
In the present embodiment, the stop operation is performed in the stop order different from the notified stop order, and when the assist state different from the lottery assist state occurs, that is, the sub gaming state is in the simulated bonus and simulated If the bonus penalty flag (refer to FIG. 77, set to S819 in the penalty determination process shown in FIG. 117) is on, in S917 of the lamp control task (refer to FIG. 121) The lamp pattern data is changed to a full lighting pattern which lights up without blinking. For this reason, it is possible to make the person watching the pachislot 1 recognize that the stop operation is performed in the stop order different from the stop order notified. That is, in the game during the first ART (simulated bonus), the person watching the pachislot 1 has a stop order different from the stop order notified when the reel lamp 22 is on without blinking when the display command is received. It can be recognized that the stop operation has been performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the aspect in which the sub CPU 102 changes the lamp pattern data of the reel lamp 22 to the full lighting pattern has been described. However, the change mode of the lamp data related to the reel lamp 22 is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily set in a range distinguishable from the case of lighting with the lamp pattern data before the change. For example, the sub CPU 102 may change the lamp pattern data of the reel lamp 22 to a completely extinguished pattern in which the lamp pattern data is extinguished without being lit. Further, the lamp pattern data related to the change is not limited to the lamp pattern data related to the reel lamp 22 when the display command is received (the third stop operation is off). For example, lamp pattern data related to the headlamp 21 may be changed. Also, for example, lamp pattern data may be changed not only at the time of display command reception but also for all effects in the first ART.

[Third Action]
Further, in the present embodiment, in the character control task (see FIG. 120), when the character pattern data for which the sub CPU 102 instructs the character control board 78 to operate is linked character pattern data, the lamp state information The operation start request or the operation end request is added (entry) to the sound reproduction state information and the animation reproduction state information (S 907). Further, when the sub CPU 102 has an operation start request or an operation end request in the lamp state information in the lamp control task (see FIG. 121), the sub CPU 102 starts or ends the rendering related to the interlocked lamp pattern data, that is, the head by interlocked lamp pattern data The LED control board 72 is instructed to light up the lamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 or to finish lighting (S919). Further, when the sub CPU 102 has an operation start request or an operation end request in the sound reproduction state information in the sound control task (see FIG. 122), the sub CPU 102 starts or ends the rendering related to the linked sound pattern data, that is, linked sound pattern data. The sound board 71 is instructed to output the effect sound from the speakers 20L and 20R or to stop the output (end) (S936). Further, when there is an operation start request or an operation end request in the animation reproduction state information in the animation control task (refer to FIG. 123), the sub CPU 102 starts or ends the rendering related to the interlocked animation pattern data, that is, interlocked animation pattern data The liquid crystal display device 11 is instructed to display the video or to stop (end) the display of the video (S946). Therefore, an image effect (effect by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 11), an audio effect (effect by outputting an effect sound from the speakers 20L and 20R), a lamp effect (lighting the headlamp 21 and the reel lamp 22 etc.) Can be synchronized with the start timing and the end timing of the effect presentation (effect produced by the rotating object 123).

  When synchronizing the start timing and end timing of all image effects, voice effects, lamp effects, and feature effects, all animation pattern data is used as linked animation pattern data, and all sound pattern data is linked as sound pattern data. Then, all lamp pattern data may be interlocked lamp pattern data, and all character pattern data may be interlocked character pattern data.

[Fourth effect]
Further, in the present embodiment, in the sound control task (see FIG. 122), the sound pattern data relating to the instruction to the sound substrate 71 is sound pattern data constituting a sound effect sequence relating to an effect of displaying a bonus determination screen. The sub CPU 102 adds marker data specified in the sound effect sequence to the sound reproduction state information at predetermined time intervals (S 938). Further, in the animation control task (see FIG. 123), when the set animation effect sequence data is a bonus determination effect sequence, the sub CPU 102 acquires sound reproduction state information stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. (S948). Then, when there is marker data in the acquired sound reproduction state information, the sub CPU 102 reproduces the divided moving image data corresponding to the marker data (displays on the liquid crystal display device 11). For this reason, even in the case where the image rendering and the audio rendering are complex renderings, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the synchronization deviation between the image rendering and the audio rendering from the middle of the rendering.

  The length of the divided moving image data (the length of the moving image) can be arbitrarily set. For example, as described above, in the case of creating divided moving image data 0 to 4 by dividing 5 seconds of moving image data into 5, the first divided moving image data 0 has a length of 0.5 seconds, and the subsequent divided moving image data The length of 1 may be set to 1.5 seconds, and the length of divided moving image data 2 may be set to 2 seconds. Further, the number of divided moving image data generated by dividing from a series of moving image data can be arbitrarily set. For example, divided moving image data may be generated by dividing moving image data of, for example, 5 seconds by 10 every 0.5 seconds. Further, the number of marker data and the timing of adding the marker data to the sound reproduction state information in the sound control task (see FIG. 122) are set to correspond to the number and the length of the generated divided moving image data.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an aspect has been described in which synchronization (hereinafter, marker data interlocking) between the image effect and the sound effect by the above-described marker data is performed at the time of the effect of displaying the bonus determination screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and marker data may be interlocked at the time of other effects.

  Further, in the present embodiment, synchronization of effects by adding an operation start request or an operation end request to sound reproduction state information, animation reproduction state information, and lamp state information in a character control task (see FIG. 120), and marker data The aspect of performing both interlocking has been described. However, instead of this, only one of them may be performed. For example, when only marker data interlocking is performed, marker data corresponding to the first divided moving image data is set, and when the marker data is instructed to the sound substrate 71 concerning the sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence. It may be added to the sound reproduction state information. Then, when there is marker data corresponding to the first divided moving image data in the acquired sound reproduction state information, the sub CPU 102 may reproduce the first divided moving image data corresponding to the marker data. In this way, it is possible to synchronize the start timing of the sound effect and the image effect by linking the marker data.

[Fifth Action]
Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the sub CPU 102 performs OFF edge execution to detect selection when the finger is separated from the touch input unit 31 a. Therefore, even when the player or the like touches his / her finger outside the position corresponding to the desired item in the touch input unit 31a when selecting the item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, it is desirable without releasing the finger. If the finger is moved to the position corresponding to the item to be released and then the finger is released, the sub CPU 102 can detect the item desired by the player or the like as the selected item.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 102 performs the OFF edge execution when the sub screen 113 displays the screen (see FIGS. 135 to 141) related to the mobile terminal cooperation function described above. . However, the trigger for the sub CPU 102 to execute the OFF edge can be set arbitrarily. For example, the OFF edge execution may be performed only when a predetermined screen is displayed on the sub screen 113, and the ON edge execution may be performed in other cases. For example, compared to the guide menu screen (see FIG. 135) and the uni memo menu screen (see FIG. 138), relatively small button-like menu items ("0" to "9" and "A" of password input menu) The sub CPU 102 may perform OFF edge execution only when the password input menu screen (FIG. 139) in which “F” is displayed is displayed.

  In addition, the sub CPU 102 may perform the OFF edge execution only for the predetermined menu item, and may perform the ON edge execution for the other menu items. For example, OFF edge execution is performed only for “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” of the password input menu which is a relatively small button menu item of the password input menu screen (FIG. 139), and others The on-edge execution may be performed for "decision", "deletion", "return to game", and "return", which are items of the menu of.

  Further, depending on the type of screen displayed on the sub screen 113, it may be set whether or not to perform the OFF edge. For example, when the screen relating to the mobile terminal cooperation function is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, OFF edge execution is performed, and when the screen relating to effects in the game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, ON edge execution You may go.

[Sixth Action]
Further, in the present embodiment, when the operation command continuous counter exceeds 288000 in S983 of the touch panel input editing process (see FIG. 125), the sub CPU 102 sets an error code “TP LONG ON” in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 103. Record Further, the sub CPU 102 displays a warning screen (see FIG. 126) on the main screen 111 for three minutes. Then, after displaying the warning screen on the main screen 111, the sub CPU 102 displays a screen displayed before the warning screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 after three minutes, and enables resumption of the game. Further, the error code recorded in the sub RAM 103 can be referred to on the error information history screen (see FIG. 130) displayed on the main screen 111 in the error information history process (S1009) in the hall menu process (see FIG. 129). . Therefore, it can be recognized that the output of the signal indicating that the touch input unit 31a is operated continues beyond the predetermined time, and it is possible to suppress the prolongation of the period in which the player can not play the game.

  The threshold (288000 in this embodiment) of the operation command continuous counter in the touch panel input editing process (see FIG. 125) can be set arbitrarily. When displaying a warning when the touch operation command or the flick operation command is included in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay board 73 for 2 hours, the threshold value of the operation command continuous counter is set to 144000. Good. In the case where the touch sensor relay substrate 73 transmits data every 100 msec, and the touch operation command or the flick operation command is included in the data transmitted from the touch sensor relay substrate 73 for four hours. When displaying a warning or the like, the threshold value of the operation command continuous counter may be set to 144000.

[Seventh operation]
Further, in the present embodiment, in the maintenance process (see FIG. 131), the sub CPU 102 displays a grid line G (see FIGS. 132 and 134) on the touch panel maintenance screen 115. When the finger moves while maintaining the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 is disposed at a position where the intersection of the grid lines G always corresponds to the position where the finger is touching the touch input unit 31a. Thus, the display position of the grid line G is changed in synchronization with the movement of the finger. Therefore, since it is possible to recognize whether or not the position of the intersection of the grid lines G displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 and the position where the finger touches the touch input unit 31a are shifted, the game machine performs touch input It can be checked whether or not the position where the finger touches the portion 31a is correctly recognized. In addition, it is possible to visually recognize whether a shift has occurred in the operation state and the attachment position of the touch input unit 31a.

  In the present embodiment, even when the touch panel maintenance screen 115 is displayed, the grid line G is displayed such that the intersection point is disposed at the initial position even when the finger does not touch the touch input unit 31a. However, instead of this, the grid line G may be displayed on the touch panel maintenance screen 115 only when it is detected that a finger is touched on the touch input unit 31a.

  In the present embodiment, when the display position of the grid line G is changed and then the finger is separated from the touch input unit 31a, the sub CPU 102 causes the grid line G to be arranged such that the intersection of the grid line G is located at the above-described initial position. The aspect which changes the display position of G was demonstrated. However, instead of this, in the same case, the sub CPU 102 arranges the intersection of the grid lines G at a position where the finger is separated from the touch input unit 31a, that is, a position corresponding to the last position touched by the finger. The state may be maintained.

<Modification>
In the above embodiment, the pachislot machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can be applied to gaming machines and slot machines called "pachinko". Here, a configuration example of a pachinko will be described.

[Configuration of pachinko gaming machine]
First, the configuration of a pachinko will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 146. FIG. 142 is a perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko according to a modification. FIG. 143 is an external front view of a pachinko according to a modification. FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view showing a configuration of a pachinko in a modified example. Further, FIG. 145 is a front view of a pachinko gaming board in a modification.

  Pachinko 210, as shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 144, a glass door 211, a crate 212, a base door 213, a game board 214, a plate unit 220, a liquid crystal display 232 for displaying an image, and a launcher for launching gaming balls. 330, a payout unit 700, a substrate unit 750, and the like.

  The glass door 211 is attached to the base door 213 so as to be openable and closable. Further, an opening 211a is formed at the center of the glass door 211, and a protective glass 219 having light transparency is attached to the opening 211a. The protective glass 219 is arranged such that its back surface faces the front surface of the game board 214 in a state where the glass door 211 is closed.

  In addition, a lamp 332 is provided on the top of the glass door 211. The lamp 332 has a group of LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes). The lamp 332 is controlled by the sub control circuit 400, and lights up in a predetermined pattern to produce a game.

  A touch input unit (touch panel) 360 a using a touch sensor module 360 is provided on the right side of the protective glass 219 as viewed from the front. The configuration of the touch sensor module 360 is the same as that of the touch sensor module 31 in the pachislot 1 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The tray unit 220 is a unit body in which the upper tray 221 and the lower tray 222 are integrated, and is attached to the lower part of the glass door 211 at the base door 213. Also, the lower plate 222 is disposed below the upper plate 221. In the upper tray 221 and the lower tray 222, payout openings 221a and 222a are formed, respectively, for lending game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls). Then, when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the gaming balls are discharged to the upper tray 221 and the lower tray 222 through the payout openings 221a and 222a, respectively, and in particular, the upper tray 221 has a gaming area 215 described later. Game balls for firing are stored.

  The launch device 330 is attached to the lower right portion of the base door 213 as viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachinko 210. The launcher 330 comprises a launch handle 226 operable by the player and a panel body 227 which fits into the space at the lower right of the tray unit 220. The launch handle 226 is provided on the front side of the panel body 227. On the back side of the panel body 227, a drive device for firing the game ball is provided.

  The tray unit 220 and the launcher 330 are attached to the base door 213, and the panel body 227 is integrally provided with the lower right portion of the tray unit 220. Then, the player operates the firing handle 226 to advance the pachinko game.

  The game board 214 is arranged to be located on the back side of the protective glass 219 and to be located on the front side of the base door 213. Further, on the back side of the game board 214, a spacer 231, a liquid crystal display device 232 and the like are arranged. Furthermore, on the back side of the base door 213, a dispensing unit 700 and a substrate unit 750 are disposed. Further, a speaker 246 is disposed below the lower tray 222. The speaker 246 is controlled by the sub control circuit 400 and outputs a predetermined effect sound to produce a game.

  The game board 214 is formed of a substantially plate-like resin material, the whole of which is light transmissive. As a resin material which has this light transmittance, various resin materials, such as an acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, a methacryl resin, correspond, for example. In addition, the game board 214 has a game area 215 in which the game balls fired by the launch device 330 can roll and flow down, and the game area 215 is provided on the front side of the game board. The game area 215 is an area surrounded by the guide rails 230 (specifically, an outer rail 230a shown in FIG. 145 described later), and is an area where the game balls can roll. Also, in the game area 215 of the game board 214, a plurality of game nails 218 are provided by being punched into the game board 214. In addition, the structure of the game board 214 shown in FIG. 145 is one structural example of a game board provided with the game area which a game ball can roll, and it is not limited to this.

  The liquid crystal display device 232 is disposed on the back side (back side) of the game board 214. That is, the liquid crystal display device 232 is disposed behind the game board 214 formed of a light transmitting material. The liquid crystal display device 232 has a display area 232a that enables display of an image related to a game. The display area 232 a is arranged to overlap with all or part of the back surface of the game board 214.

  In other words, the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 is disposed on the back side of the game board 214 so as to at least overlap with all or part of the game area 215 of the game board 214. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 232 is disposed on the back side of the game board 214 so that the display area 232a overlaps with all or part of the game area 215 and all or part of the game area outer area 216. . In the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232, various images such as an identification pattern for effect, an effect image, and a decoration image for decoration are displayed. In the present modification, a region facing the touch input unit 360a of the display region 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 in the front-rear direction may be referred to as a sub screen 232c, and the other region may be referred to as a main screen 232b.

  The spacer 231 is disposed between the rear (rear side) of the game board 214 and the front (front side) of the liquid crystal display device 232, and defines a space which becomes a flow path of the game balls rolled on the game board 214. Do. Further, an LED unit 253 (see FIG. 145) is provided below the spacer 231. The spacer 231 is formed of a light transmissive material. In this example, the spacer 231 is formed of a light transmitting material, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a part of the spacer 231 is formed of a light transmitting material It may be done. Also, the spacer 231 may be formed of a material having no light transparency.

  The firing handle 226 is rotatable, and on the back of the firing handle 226, a drive solenoid (not shown) is provided. In addition, a touch sensor (not shown) is provided at the periphery of the firing handle 226. Furthermore, inside the firing handle 226, a firing volume (not shown) is provided which changes the resistance according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 226 to change the power supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown).

  When the player contacts a touch sensor (not shown) provided on the peripheral portion of the firing handle 226, it is detected by the player that the firing handle 226 is gripped. When the firing handle 226 is held by the player and rotated in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front side (player's side), the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) changes according to the rotation angle Power corresponding to the resistance value at this time is supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown). As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 221 are sequentially fired to the game area 215 of the game board 214, and the game is advanced. When the firing stop button (not shown) is pressed, firing of the game ball is stopped even when the shooting handle 226 is held and rotated.

  In the lower left area in the game board 214, a decoration member in which three general winning openings 256a, 256b, 256c are formed is disposed, and a portion of the decoration member facing the LED unit 253 is transparent. There is. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 145, the LED unit 253 is visible from the lower left region of the game board 214. The LED unit 253 includes a special symbol display device, a normal symbol display device 233, a first special symbol hold display LED 234a, 234b, a second special symbol hold display LED 234c, 234d, a normal symbol hold display LED 250a, 250b, etc. Reference) is provided.

  The special symbol display device is configured of 16 LEDs in this example. These sixteen LEDs are divided into two groups of eight LEDs, the details of which will be described later, but one of the groups performs variable display in response to the start winning to the first start port 225 In the other group, the variable display is performed in response to the start winning on the second start port 244 as a trigger. In the following, for convenience of explanation, one of the LED groups is the first special symbol display device 235a (see FIG. 146 described later), and the other LED group is the second special symbol display device 235b (see FIG. 146 described later) It is called.

  The LEDs of the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b perform the variable display which repeats lighting and extinguishing in group units when the predetermined variable display start condition of the special symbol is satisfied. Then, a display pattern formed by turning on and off the eight LEDs is stopped and displayed as a special symbol (also referred to as an identification symbol). In the case of the specific stop display mode, the special symbol on which the stop display is made changes the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the winning gaming state (special gaming state), which is an advantageous state for the player. When the player enters the hit gaming state, as described later, the shutter 240 (see FIG. 145) is controlled to be in the open state, and the special winning opening 239 (see FIG. 145) can receive the gaming ball. It becomes.

  In other words, the game in which the big winning opening 239 is opened is a hit game, and in this example, two types of hit games, a big hit game and a small hit game, are prepared. In addition, it is a small hit that the special symbol is a stop display mode in which the special symbol shifts to the big hit gaming state, and a special symbol is a stop display mode in which the special symbol shifts to the small hit gaming state.

  Although the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described later, in the case of the big hit, there is a high possibility of acquiring a large number of balls, and in the case of a small ball, it can not be expected very much. On the other hand, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, the gaming state is maintained. As described above, after the special symbol is variably displayed, the stop display is performed, and the game in which the gaming state is shifted or maintained as a result is referred to as a "special symbol game".

  Below the special symbol display device, a normal symbol display device 233 is provided. The normal symbol display device 233 is composed of two display lamps, and the normal symbols are variably displayed by alternately turning on and off the display lamps. Then, after the normal symbol is variably displayed, the stop display is performed, and the game in which the open / close state of the ordinary electric power role object 248 (see FIG. 145) is different according to the result is referred to as a “normal symbol game”.

  Under the normal symbol display device 233, normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a and 250b are provided. The normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a and 250b display the number of times the variable symbol display of the normal symbol held is held by lighting, extinguishing or blinking (so-called "number of held holdings", "number of held holdings for normal symbols").

  Specifically, when execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for one time, the normal symbol suspension display LED 250a is turned on, and the normal symbol suspension display LED 250b is turned off. When the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for two times, the normal symbol suspension display LED 250a is turned on and the normal symbol suspension display LED 250b is turned on. When the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the normal symbol suspension display LED 250 a blinks, and the normal symbol suspension display LED 250 b lights. When the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for four times, the normal symbol suspension display LED 250 a blinks, and the normal symbol suspension display LED 250 b blinks.

  The first special symbol hold display LEDs 234a and 234b and the second special symbol hold display LEDs 234c and 234d are provided below the normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a and 250b. These first special symbol hold display LEDs 234a, 234b and the second special symbol hold display LEDs 234c, 234d are the number of times the variable symbol display of the special symbol held by lighting, extinguishing or blinking is performed (so-called "number of holdings", "special symbol Display the number of pending "). The display mode of the number of holdings for the special symbol by the first special symbol hold display LEDs 234a, 234b and the second special symbol hold display LEDs 234c, 234d is the same as the display manner of the normal symbol hold number by the normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a, 250b. is there.

  On the side of the normal symbol display device 233, a hit notification LED (not shown) that lights up regardless of a big hit or a small hit is provided. In this example, since the number of rounds is constant, no LED for displaying the number of rounds is provided. Therefore, on the display of the hit notification LED controlled by the main control circuit 260 (see FIG. 146 described later), there is no difference in notification of the big hit and the small hit. Also, between the sudden big hit and the small hit, as described later, the opening / closing pattern of the shutter 240 when the hit is generated is also selected from the same, and the sub control circuit 400 (see FIG. 146 described later) The effects by the liquid crystal display device 232, the lamp 332, the speaker 246, and the rotary combination 371 described later controlled by the above are the same. For this reason, the player can not distinguish them in appearance even between the sudden big hit and the small hit.

  Further, in the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 disposed on the back side (back side) of the game board 214, the display is made by the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b (see FIG. 146 described later). The effect image associated with the special symbol to be played is displayed.

  For example, during the variable display of the special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b, except in a specific case, the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 is composed of numbers Identification symbols (also identification information for effects), for example, numbers such as "1 to 8" are variably displayed. In addition, for example, the special symbol which is variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b is stopped and displayed, and also in the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232, an identification symbol as an effect Is stopped.

  In addition, in the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b, when the special symbol which is changed or stopped is a specific stop display mode, the player is made to grasp that it is a hit. The effect image is displayed on the display area 232 a of the liquid crystal display device 232. Specifically, in any one of the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b, a special symbol is, for example, a stop display in a specific display mode corresponding to a big hit that many balls can be acquired. If the combination of the identification symbols for effect displayed in the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 is displayed in a specific display mode (for example, stop in a state where all the same symbols are aligned in each of a plurality of symbol rows) The displayed image is displayed on the display area 232 a of the liquid crystal display device 232. In the case of a hit where it is difficult to obtain many balls (small hit, 15 times sudden probability big hit, 16 times sudden probability big hit), a display of the liquid crystal display device 232 is made to make the player understand that it is a hit It may not be displayed in the area 232a.

  As shown in FIG. 145, on the game board 214 of the pachinko 210, the guide rails 230 (230a and 230b), the stage 255, the first starting port 225, the second starting port 244, the passing gate 254, the shutter 240, the big winnings The game members such as the mouth 239, the general winning openings 256a, 256b, 256c, and 256d, and the ordinary electric character 248 are provided.

  At the top of the game board 214, a substantially reverse L-shaped stage 255 is provided. Further, a guide rail 230 is provided to surround the game area 215.

  The guide rail 230 is composed of an outer rail 230a that defines the gaming area 215 and an inner rail 230b disposed inside the outer rail 230a. The game balls fired by the launch device 330 are guided by the guide rails 230 provided on the game board 214 and moved to the upper part of the game board 214 and then provided on the plurality of game nails 218 and game board 214 Due to the collision with the stage 255 or the like, it flows downward toward the bottom of the game board 214 while changing its traveling direction. Specifically, as the flow-down system of the gaming ball, the system (so-called, left-handed) flowing down the left side of the stage 255 and the firing handle 226 are maximally rotated to the right to drive the gaming ball on the right side of the stage 255 , A system which flows down the right side of the stage 255 (so-called right-handed).

  Further, below the stage 255 and below the center of the game board 214, a first start port 225 is provided. In addition, a passing gate 254 is provided on the upper right side of the stage 255, and a second starting port 244 is provided below the passing gate 254. The second starting port 244 is provided with the ordinary electric jack 248. The ordinary electric character 248 includes a tongue member 248 a that projects and retracts in the front-rear direction with respect to the plate surface of the game board 214. In this example, when the tongue-like member 248a is projecting, the gaming ball on the tongue-like member 248a wins the second starting opening 244, and when the tongue-like member 248a is retracted, the gaming ball is second It is configured so as not to win the starting opening 244.

  Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed with the predetermined symbol in the normal symbol display device 233 (see FIG. 146 described later), the tongue member 248a in the normal electric character 248 is in a projecting state from the retracted state for a predetermined time. The game ball can easily enter the second starting opening 244. The ordinary electric part 248 is not limited to the one for projecting and pulling in the tongue member 248a, and may be, for example, one for opening and closing a pair of wing members (so-called electric tulip).

  In addition, when the game ball is struck on the right side of the stage 255, the game nail 218 is driven into the path where the game ball rolls from the right side of the stage 255 to the first starting opening 225. , It is impossible for the game ball to win the first starting opening 225 from the right side of the stage 255.

  If the game ball passes through the pass gate 254 during the variation display of the normal symbol, the display mode by the normal symbol retention display LEDs 250a and 250b is switched, and the pass gate is displayed until the normal symbol in the variation display is stopped and displayed. Execution (start) of the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to 254 is suspended. After that, when the normal symbol which has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol which has been suspended is started.

  In addition, when a specific symbol is displayed as a normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 233 as a stop symbol, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp that the normal symbol lottery is a win is displayed in the display area 232a of the liquid crystal display device 232 It may be done.

  A shutter 240 for opening and closing the special winning opening 239 is disposed immediately below the first start opening 225. An out port 257 is formed at the lowermost portion of the game area 215 immediately below the shutter 240. At the lower left side of the game area 215, three general winning openings 256a, 256b, 256c are provided. In the lower right part of the game area 215, a general winning opening 256d is provided.

  Further, a winning area is provided in the above-described first starting opening 225, and a first starting winning opening switch 316 (see FIG. 146 described later) is provided in the winning area. A winning area is provided in the second starting opening 244, and a second starting winning opening switch 317 (see FIG. 146 described later) is provided in the winning area. When a game medium such as a game ball is detected by the first start winning opening switch 316, the variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 235a is started.

  Also, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 225 during the variable symbol display of the special symbol, the game ball enters the first starting opening 225 until the special symbol in the variable display is stopped. The execution (start) of the variation display of the special symbol based on is suspended. After that, when the special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the special symbol that has been suspended is started. In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 235a based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 225 is referred to as a first special symbol.

  When a game medium such as a game ball is detected by the second start winning opening switch 317, the variation display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 235b is started. Also, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 244 during the variation display of the special symbol, the game ball entering the second starting opening 244 until the special symbol in the variation display is stopped. The execution (start) of the variation display of the special symbol based on is suspended. After that, when the special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the special symbol that has been suspended is started.

  In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 235b based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 244 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  In this example, the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b do not simultaneously change the special symbol. Further, in this example, the variation display of the special symbol is performed with priority given to the start winning to the second start opening 244. The first starting opening 225 and the second starting opening 244 in this example are provided in the gaming area of the gaming board 214 and are examples of starting areas through which gaming balls can pass.

  In this example, the upper limit is set to the number of times that the execution of the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, and the display of the variable symbol of the special symbol by entering the first starting port 225 and the second starting port 244 is suspended. The upper limit of the number is set to 4 times each. Specifically, when the special symbol game of the first special symbol is held four times, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol in movement is the main RAM 270 (see FIG. 134 described later) The first special symbol start memory area (0) is stored as start memory information in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory The area (4) is stored as start-up memory information.

  Similarly, regarding the special symbol game of the second special symbol, when the special symbol game of the second special symbol is held four times, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol in motion is main The information on the four special symbol games stored as start storage information in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the RAM 270 (see FIG. 146 described later) and held is the second special symbol start storage area (1 )-The second special symbol start storage area (4) is stored as start storage information. Therefore, in this example, the special symbol game can be suspended up to eight times.

  Moreover, as a variation display start condition of other predetermined special symbols in this example, the special symbols are stopped and displayed. That is, the variable display of the special symbol is started every time the variable display start condition of the predetermined special symbol is satisfied.

  In the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b, when the special symbol is the specific stop display mode and the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, the shutter 240 is in the open state where it is easy to receive the gaming ball It is driven to become As a result, the special winning opening 239 is in an open state (first state) in which the game ball can be easily received.

  On the other hand, the special winning opening 239 provided on the back side (rear) of the shutter 240 has an area (not shown) having a count switch 304 (see FIG. 134 described later), and the area is a predetermined number of gaming balls For example, seven shutters are driven to be open until passing or after a predetermined time (for example, about 0.1 seconds or about 30 seconds) has elapsed. Then, in the open state, when any of the conditions for winning a predetermined number of gaming balls to the big winning opening 239 or the lapse of a predetermined time is satisfied, the shutter 240 is driven to be in a closed state where it is difficult to accept the gaming balls. . As a result, the special winning opening 239 is in a closed state where it is difficult to accept the game ball (second state).

  In addition, the game in which the big winning opening 239 is in a state where it is easy to receive the game ball in a fixed time is called a round game. Therefore, the shutter 240 is opened at the round game and closed between the round games. Further, the number of round games is counted as the number of rounds such as “1” round, “2” round, and the like. For example, the first round game may be referred to as the first round, and the second round game may be referred to as the second round. In this example, in one round, the shutter 240 may be opened and closed a plurality of times, and the time in which the shutter 240 is in the open state may be set as a fixed time.

  Then, the shutter 240 driven from the open state (first state) to the closed state (second state) is driven to the open state again. That is, when the round game is over, it is possible to continue to the next round game. A game from the round game of the first round to the end of the round game (final round game) which can not continue to the next round game is called a special game or a jackpot game. In this example, the number of round games in all the big hit is 15 rounds.

  Further, in this example, when the special symbol is a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b, and the gaming state is shifted to the small hitting gaming state, the special winning opening 239 The shutter 240 is driven so as to be in an open state in which the game ball can be received 15 times or 16 times. The small hit game is a game in which the big winning opening 239 is opened 15 times or 16 times, and there is no concept of a round game like a big hit. However, the above-described configurations of the special winning opening 239 and the shutter 240 are provided on the game board 214, and can be changed between an open state where the game ball can easily enter and a closed state where the game ball is difficult to enter It is one structural example of a variable member.

  In addition, when the game ball wins in the first start opening 225, the second start opening 244, the general winning openings 256a to 256d, and the large winning opening 239, the number of game balls set in advance according to the type of each winning opening Are dispensed to the upper plate 221 or the lower plate 222.

  Also, in this example, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state shifts to a time saving state in which the holding balls of the special symbol game are easily accumulated due to the support by the ordinary electric role 248 when the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery becomes high probability state. There is a case. In this example, in the time saving state, passing the gaming ball through the pass gate 254 is a condition for executing the normal symbol lottery, so the game is advanced while hitting the right.

  In addition, when a big hit occurs in a right-handed state, it is possible to make a prize in the big winning opening 239 by continuing the right-handed as it is. In addition, when the support by the ordinary electric character 248 is not received, the game is advanced while hitting left.

  In addition, on the game board 214 of the pachinko 210, a rotary character unit 370 is provided. The rotary combination unit 370 is disposed at the lower right of the game board 214, and includes a rotary combination (gear combination) 371 and a combination drive unit 372 including a stepping motor that rotates the combination 371 (see FIG. 146). ) And. The rotation combination 371 is controlled by the sub control circuit 400, and when a predetermined effect is performed, the rotation combination 371 rotates in a pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect to produce a game.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 143, three effect buttons 280a, 280b and 280c are provided on the front side of the upper tray 221, and during the mini games such as a face-pushing game, card flipping, sugoroku etc. By pressing the effect button, it is possible to change the effect display content on the liquid crystal display device 232. In addition, the image of the shape similar to effect button 280a, 280b, 280c is displayed on the sub screen 232c of the liquid crystal display device 232, and the position corresponding to the part which displayed the said image of the sub screen 232C in the touch input unit 30a The effect display content on the liquid crystal display device 232 may be changed according to the finger touching the part facing in the direction. In this case, the installation of the three effect buttons 280a, 280b, 280c can be omitted.

[Circuit configuration of pachinko]
Next, the circuit configuration of the pachinko 210 in this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko 210 of this example.

  The pachinko 210 is mainly configured by a main control circuit 260 that controls a game and a sub control circuit 400 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game.

  The main control circuit 260 includes a main CPU 266, a main ROM 268 (read only memory), and a main RAM 270 (read / write memory).

  The main CPU 266 is connected to the main ROM 268, the main RAM 270, and the like, and has a function of executing various processing in accordance with the program stored in the main ROM 268.

  The main ROM 268 stores various programs for controlling the operation of the pachinko 210 by the main CPU 266, various programs for causing the main CPU 266 to execute main processing and the like, and various tables and the like necessary for the various processing.

  The main RAM 270 is a temporary storage area of the main CPU 266 and has a function of storing values of various flags and variables necessary for various processes. In this example, the main RAM 270 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 266. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any temporary storage area of the main CPU 266 can be used as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium. The thing can be used.

  The main control circuit 260 also includes an initial reset circuit 264, an I / O port 271, and a command output port 272. The initial reset circuit 264 is a circuit that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 266. The I / O port 271 is a port that transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 266, and is a port that transmits output signals from the main CPU 266 to various devices. The command output port 272 is a port for transmitting a command output from the main CPU 266 to the sub control circuit 400.

  The main control circuit 260 also includes a backup capacitor 274. The backup capacitor 274 is provided, for example, to quickly supply power to the main RAM 270 at the time of power interruption. As a result, various data stored in the main RAM 270 can be held even at power-off.

  Further, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 260.

  In this example, the first special symbol display device 235a and the second special symbol display device 235b for variably displaying special symbols in the special symbol game as various devices responsive to the signal output from the main control circuit 260, in the special symbol game The first special symbol hold display LED 234a, 234b and the second special symbol hold display LED 234c, 234d to display the number of pending variable display of the special symbol, Normal symbol display device that performs variable display of the normal symbol as the identification symbol in the normal symbol game 233, normal symbol hold display LEDs 250a and 250b for displaying the number of held variable displays of normal symbols in the normal symbol game, starting opening solenoid 318 for making the tongue member 248a of the ordinary electric character 248 be in a projecting state or drawing in, shutter 240 To open the big winning opening 239 or close it. Winning opening solenoid 320 such that the state is connected to the main control circuit 260.

  The main control circuit 260 is also used to transmit data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of hits, etc., or a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines throughout the hall. External terminal board 510 is connected.

  Further, the main control circuit 260 includes, for example, a count switch 304 for supplying a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 260 when the gaming ball passes through the area in the special winning opening 239, and each general winning opening 256a to 256d. When the game ball passes, when the game ball passes the general winning a prize opening switch 306, 308, 310, 312 and the passing gate 254 which supplies the specified detection signal to the main control circuit 260, the specified detection signal is mainly When the gaming ball wins the pass gate switch 314 supplied to the control circuit 260 and the first start port 225, a first start winning opening switch 316 and a second start port 244 which supply a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 260 When the game ball wins, the second start winning opening switch 317 which supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 260, and back-out at power-off etc. Such as backup clear switch 324 to be cleared in accordance with the Pudeta operation of the gaming field of administrators is connected.

  Further, a payout / firing control circuit 326 is connected to the main control circuit 260. To the payout / firing control circuit 326, a payout device 328 for paying out gaming balls, a launching device 330 for launching gaming balls, and a card unit 500 are connected. The card unit 500 can be transmitted and received to and from the ball lending operation panel 355 which outputs a signal requesting the card unit 500 to lend the gaming ball by the operation of the player.

  The payout / firing control circuit 326 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 260 and a rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 500, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 328. The payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 328 is controlled. Further, the payout / firing control circuit 326 supplies power to the firing solenoid according to the turning angle when the firing handle 226 is held by the player and turned clockwise. Control the firing operation of the ball.

  Further, the sub control circuit 400 is connected to the command output port 272. The sub control circuit 400 controls various effects in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 260, that is, controls the rotary combination product unit 370, controls the display on the liquid crystal display 232, and sounds generated from the speaker 246 And control of the lamps including the lamp 332 and the like. Further, the sub control circuit 400 has the same configuration as that of the sub control circuit 101 described in the pachislot 1 of the above embodiment, and can execute various similar processing.

  That is, the sub control circuit 400 can execute the same control as the above-mentioned accessory control task (see FIG. 120) in the control of the rotary accessory unit 370. It should be noted that some of the feature pattern data making up the feature presentation sequence in this case have start conditions set to start rendering of the pattern indicated by the feature pattern data, and the start conditions are: For example, the input to the touch input unit 361 and the pressing of the effect buttons 280a, 280b, and 280c are set.

  The sub control circuit 400 can execute the same control as the lamp control task (see FIG. 121) in the control of the lamp including the lamp 332 and the like. In the control of the lamp, the processing of S915 to S917 of the lamp control task (see FIG. 121) is omitted. Further, there are lamp pattern data constituting the lamp effect sequence in this case, in which there are set start conditions for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the lamp pattern data, and as the start conditions, for example, touch The input to the input unit 361 and the pressing of the effect buttons 280a, 280b and 280c are set.

  Further, in the control related to the sound generated from the speaker 246, the sub control circuit 400 can execute the same control as the sound control task (see FIG. 122). The sound pattern data constituting the sound effect sequence in this case includes a start condition for starting the effect of the pattern indicated by the sound pattern data, and the start condition may be, for example, a touch. The input to the input unit 361 and the pressing of the effect buttons 280a, 280b and 280c are set.

  In addition, in the display control of the liquid crystal display device 232, the sub control circuit 400 executes the same control as the above-mentioned animation control task (see FIG. 123). In the display control, S947 of the above-mentioned animation control task (see FIG. 123) is a case where the animation effect sequence data set in S944 has a predetermined effect such as a stop display mode in which the special symbol shifts to the big hit gaming state It becomes a process to determine whether it is an animation effect sequence relating to the effect of. In addition, some animation pattern data constituting the animation presentation sequence in this case has a start condition set to start presentation of the pattern indicated by the animation pattern data, and the start condition may be, for example, a touch The input to the input unit 361 and the pressing of the effect buttons 280a, 280b and 280c are set.

  The sub control circuit 400 can execute the same process as the touch panel control task (see FIG. 124) and the touch panel input editing process (see FIG. 125) in the control of the touch sensor module 360. The sub control circuit 400 performs OFF edge execution similar to that of the pachi slot 1 when the touch sensor module 360 causes the operator such as a player to select the selectable item displayed on the liquid crystal display device 232, ie, touch The selection can be detected when the finger is removed from the input unit 360a.

  Further, the sub control circuit 400 can execute the same processing as the hall menu task (see FIG. 127), the hall menu process (see FIG. 129), and the maintenance process (FIG. 131). That is, the sub control circuit 400 can display a cross-shaped grid line formed of a vertical line and a horizontal line orthogonal to the vertical line on the sub screen 232c at the time of maintenance processing.

  As described above, even in the pachinko 210 of the modified example described above, the sub control circuit 400 can execute the same process as the process described in the pachislot 1 in the above embodiment. Therefore, the same effect as the embodiment of the pachislot 1 can be obtained.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described including its effects. However, it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described herein, and includes various embodiments without departing from the scope of the present invention described in the claims.

  For example, in the present embodiment, when "bonus win" is determined by bonus lottery, any of "SBB", "BB", and "RB" is determined by bonus distribution lottery. However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by bonus distribution lottery, and one of "SBB" and "BB" is determined at the end of the precursor game. May be

  Further, in the present embodiment, the “BB precursor flag” is turned on when the “SBB” or “BB” precursor game is being played. That is, the "SBB" and "BB" precursor games are managed by the "BB precursor flag". However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to have a precursor flag for "SBB" and a precursor flag for "BB". In this case, the effect of the precursor game corresponding to "SBB" and the effect of the precursor game corresponding to "BB" may be made different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first ART (“SBB”, “BB”, “RB”) and the second ART end on condition that the game of the number of staying games has been consumed. However, the first ART and the second ART according to the present invention may be configured to end on the condition that a predetermined number of navigations (notification of display auxiliary information) have been performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of staying games of “SBB” in the first ART is fixed to “100”. However, as “SBB” according to the present invention, similarly to “BB”, the number of staying games may be added to the number of staying games during “SBB” (addition).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games for rendering additional additional A, B, and C that may occur in BR is fixed to “2”. That is, when the effects of the additional additions A, B, and C are determined, “2” is set in the additional additional game number counter. However, the number of games providing the effects of additional additions A, B and C according to the present invention may be variable. For example, the value to be set to the additional added game number counter may be made different depending on the type of the additional additional effect (additional additional A, B, C).

Also, in the present embodiment, the aspect in which “50” is determined as the number of staying games of the second ART has been described. However, instead of this, a predetermined number of games may be set as one set (for example, one set “50” games), and the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of staying games of the second ART may be set to two sets of one set “50” games, ie, a total of “100” games.
Further, in this case, a predetermined period may be provided between sets without notifying the stop order and not subtracting the value of the ART game number counter every game. In addition, the additional game number lottery may be performed for each game in this predetermined period. Then, before this predetermined period ends (when the number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, this predetermined period ends before the predetermined number of games is reached), the stop order other than the forward press If the stop operation (anomalous press) is performed, the predetermined period is forcibly ended, and the value of the ART game number counter is decremented by 1 from the next game of the game in which the irregular press was performed. You may

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the accessory provided in the pachi slot 1, the rotary accessory unit 122 having the rotary accessory 123 rotated by the drive of the stepping motor has been described as an example. However, the invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachi slot 1 may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, or the front-back direction by driving a stepping motor or a solenoid.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachi slot (game machine), 2 ... exterior body, 2a ... cabinet, 2b ... front door, 3L ... left reel (variation display means), 3C ... middle reel (variation display means), 3R ... right reel (variation display means 4L: left display window, 4C: middle display window, 4R: right display window, 11: liquid crystal display device (display means), 16: start lever, 17L: left stop button, 17C: middle stop button, 17R: right Stop button 20L, 20R ... speaker 22 ... reel lamp 31 ... touch sensor module (touch sensor module 31) 46S ... medal sensor (input operation detection means) 64 ... start switch (start operation detection means) 91 ... Main control circuit (internal winning combination determination means, stop control means, gaming medium application means), 93 ... main CPU, 01 ... sub-control circuit (display control means), 102 ... sub CPU, 122 ... rotary won game unit

Claims (2)

Start operation detection means for detecting a start operation by a player;
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means;
Variation display means configured of a plurality of display rows, and variably displaying symbols necessary for the game based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means;
Stop operation detection means for detecting a stop operation by the player;
Stop control means for stopping the fluctuation display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means;
A rendering device for rendering a game,
A game lock control means for generating a game lock which invalidates or delays detection of a game operation by a player for a predetermined period when a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means;
A main control circuit that performs various controls in accordance with the progress of the game;
And a sub control circuit for controlling the rendering device.
The main control circuit variably displays the symbols of the plurality of display rows during occurrence of the game lock, and stops the variation display regardless of the detection of the stop operation by the player.
The gaming machine, wherein the sub control circuit causes the rendering device to perform a predetermined effect when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of braking of the variable display of the symbol during the occurrence of the game lock. The sub control circuit is
Before the main control circuit stops fluctuating display of the symbols of the plurality of display rows while the game lock is occurring, the rendering device is caused to perform a specific effect different from the predetermined effect,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the content of the specific effect is determined based on an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means.

Images